Contents

BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 282
1 of 282

Summary of Content for BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

650i Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/11, 03 11 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 272.

Using this Owner's Manual 6 Notes

At a glance 12 Cockpit 19 iDrive 25 Voice activation system 27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls 32 Opening and closing 53 Adjusting 62 Transporting children safely 65 Driving 74 Displays 84 Lamps 88 Safety 101 Driving stability control systems 106 Driving comfort 123 Climate control 128 Interior equipment 132 Storage compartments

Driving tips 138 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 146 Navigation

Entertainment 164 Tone 166 Radio 173 CD/multimedia

Communication 196 Telephone 207 Office 216 Contacts 218 BMW ConnectedDrive

Mobility 226 Refueling 228 Fuel 229 Wheels and tires 236 Engine compartment 238 Engine oil 241 Maintenance 243 Replacing components 248 Breakdown assistance 254 Care

Reference 260 Technical data 263 Short commands of the voice activation

system 272 Everything from A to Z

Seite 5

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. * Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Your individual vehicle You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi vidualized equipment and features. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available for a specific model. As a result, the manual may contain accessories and equipment that you may not have specified for your own vehicle. All options and special equipment are marked with an asterisk *. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple mentary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustra tions.

Status of the Owner's Manual The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

Seite 6

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

No te

s

For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, re quires suitable maintenance and repair meth ods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and Accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac cessories approved by BMW. When you pur chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from de fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from in stallation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod ucts approved by BMW, together with profes sional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or trans ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center

for additional information. Maintenance, re placement, or repair of the emission control de vices and systems may be performed by any au tomotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re productive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op erated under those conditions. If you wish to op

Seite 7

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

erate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita tions or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 8

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

No te

s

Seite 9

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Cockpit All around the steering wheel

1 Opening and closing the rear win dow44

2 Open and close windows together44 3 Open and close rear windows43 4 Open and close front windows43 5 Exterior mirror operation59 6 Driver assistance systems*

Active Blind Spot Detec tion*98

Lane departure warning*97

Night Vision with pedestrian de tection*118

Head-up Display*121

7 Lamps

Front fog lamps*87

Parking lamps84

Low beams84

Automatic headlamp con trol*85 Daytime running lights*85 Adaptive light control*85 High-beam Assistant*86 Instrument lighting87

8 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal69

High beams, head lamp flasher69

Seite 12

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Co ck

pi t

High-beam Assistant*86

Roadside parking lamps85

Computer76

9 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed*106

Resume speed107

Cruise control on/off, inter rupt106

10 Instrument cluster14 11 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation*25

Telephone*196

12 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers69

Rain sensor*70

Clean the windshields and head lamps*70

13 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off66

14 Horn 15 Steering wheel heating*61

16 Adjust the steering wheel61

17 Unlocking the hood 18 Open the trunk lid40

Seite 13

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge74 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps14 4 Tachometer75 5 Engine oil temperature75

6 External temperature75 7 Electronic displays16 8 Miles, trip miles76 9 Clock79 10 Reset miles76

Indicator/warning lamps Instrument cluster

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ig nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the process.

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal

Parking brake

Parking brake in Canadian models

Automatic Hold*

Front fog lamps*

Seite 14

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Co ck

pi t

Symbol Function or system

High beams

High-beam Assistant*

Parking lamps, headlamp control

Cruise control*

Lane departure warning*

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Tire Pressure Monitor* Flat Tire Monitor

Safety belts

Airbag system

Steering system

Symbol Function or system

Emissions

Brake system

Brake system in Canadian models

Antilock Brake System ABS

Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana dian models

Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Additional information on the Control Display, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re quired action, can be called up via Check Con trol, refer to page 82. The text of urgent messages is displayed auto matically.

Seite 15

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Instrument cluster, electronic displays

1 Symbols and messages, e.g., warnings14 2 Range74 3 Computer76 4 Navigation display*146

Service display81

5 Selection list, e.g., radio76 6 Transmission displays73

Seite 16

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Co ck

pi t

All around the center console

1 All around the interior rearview mir ror18

2 Control Display19 3 Glove compartment132 4 Air vent126 5 Hazard warning system248

Central locking system39

6 Radio166 CD/multimedia173

7 Automatic climate control123 8 Controller with buttons19 9 Parking brake67

Automatic Hold*67

10 Opening and closing the converti ble top46

11 PDC Park Distance Con trol*107 Top View*112 Backup camera*110 Parking assistant*115 Side View*114

12 Dynamic Driving Control*103

DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol101

13 Transmission selector lever

Seite 17

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

All around the interior rearview mirror

1 Emergency Request*248

2 Reading lamps*87

3 Interior lamps87

4 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag*90

Seite 18

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Co ck

pi t

iDrive The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper ated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

Control Display

Notes To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Controller Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn.

2. Press.

Seite 19

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

CD Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation map view.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previous display.

Seite 20

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

iD riv

e

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis played.

Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged. Control options for the selected main menu,

e.g., for "Radio". If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

Seite 21

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the sta tus field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception*.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

Traffic bulletins* are switched on.

HD Radio* is switched on.

Satellite radio* is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call*.

Missed call*.

Wireless network reception strength* Symbol flashes: searching for network.

Wireless network is not available*.

Bluetooth* is switched on.

Roaming* is active.

Text message* was received.

Check the SIM card*.

SIM card* is blocked.

SIM card* is missing.

Enter the PIN*.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD* player.

Music collection*.

Gracenote database*.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface*.

Mobile phone audio interface*.

Seite 22

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

iD riv

e

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions* are switched off.

Request of the current vehicle posi tion*.

Split screen* General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content". 5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

To display short information: touch the but ton.

To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Seite 23

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds. 2. "OK"

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num

bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the letter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Enter a blank space.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case letters:

Symbol Function

Move the controller up: switch from upper to lower case letters.

Move the controller up: switch from lower to upper case letters.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the en

try for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can be

entered using the spelling of language avail able on the Control Display.

Seite 24

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

iD riv

e

Voice activation system* The concept The voice activation system can be used to

operate functions by means of spoken com mands.

Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The system prompts you to make your entries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us ing the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation sys tem.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identified. Set the language, refer to page 80.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instrument cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, continue operating the function via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands Having possible commands read aloud The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Dis play. To have the available commands read out loud: Voice commands For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the

current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are announced.

Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, irrespec tive of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, refer to page 263.

Seite 25

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Example: playing back a CD 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back.

4. Press the button on the steering wheel.

5. C D track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an nouncements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel ephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 248, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

When selecting a radio station, use the com mon pronunciation of the station name.

Keep the doors, windows, and convertible top closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 26

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Vo ic

e ac

tiv at

io n

sy st

em

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri bed therein.

Components of the integrated Owner's Manual The integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor mation or access possibilities.

Quick Reference Guide Located in the Quick Reference is important in formation for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.

Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.

Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

1. Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range:

"Quick reference" "Search by pictures"

"Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.

Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.

Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened directly.

Opening during operation via iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:

Seite 27

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly.

Storing 1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im

mediately.

Seite 28

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

In te

gr at

ed O

wn er

's M

an ua

l in th

e ve

hi cl

e

Seite 29

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are

useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Opening and closing Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Trunk lid 4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture

General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal Profile, refer to page 33. In addition, information about service require ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 241.

Integrated key

Press the button on the back of the remote con trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door. Storage compartment in the center armrest. The storage compartment contains a switch for the hotel function, refer to page 39.

Replacing the battery

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart

ment; see arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the

positive side facing upwards. 5. Press the cover closed.

Take the used battery to a recycling cen ter or to your service center.

Seite 32

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Interference of radio transmission to remote

control by external sources. Discharged battery in the remote control. A Check Control message is displayed if an at tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine in case of emergency detection of remote control

Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote con trol, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch.

Personal Profile The concept

Personal Profile concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. The settings are automatically saved in the

profile currently activated. When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that

was last detected and called up with the re mote control is used.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for three Per sonal Profiles and one guest profile.

Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro file function. For more information, contact your service center. Transmission takes place via: The USB interface*, refer to page 132, in

the glove compartment onto a USB device.

Profile management

Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings"

Seite 33

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

2. "Profiles"

3. Select a profile. The profile that is opened is assigned to the re mote control currently in use.

Renaming profiles 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile"

Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile"

4. USB interface, refer to page 132: "USB device"

Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. This can be useful for storing and opening per sonal settings, for instance if settings are acci dentally changed or deleted.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. USB interface, refer to page 132: "USB

device"

Using the guest profile The guest profile can be used to make individual settings without affecting the three Personal Profiles. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. The current profile is selected. 4. Open "Guest". 5. Create the settings. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.

Seite 34

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display user list at startup"

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. More information on the settings can be found under: Exterior mirror position, refer to page 59. CD/Multimedia, refer to page 173: audio

source listened to last. Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re

fer to page 104. Driver's seat position, refer to page 37: au

tomatic retrieval after unlocking. Programmable memory buttons, refer to

page 23: assignment. Head-up Display, refer to page 121: selec

tion, brightness and position of the display. Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to

page 84: time setting. Tone, refer to page 164: tone settings. Automatic climate control, refer to

page 123: settings. Steering wheel position, refer to page 60. Navigation, refer to page 146: map views,

route criteria, voice output on/off. Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer

to page 118: selection of functions and type of display.

Daytime running lights*, refer to page 85: current setting.

Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 165: adjusting the signal tone volume.

Radio, refer to page 166: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings.

Backup camera, refer to page 110: selec tion of functions and type of display.

Side View, refer to page 114: selection of the display type.

Language on the Control Display, refer to page 80.

Lane departure warning, refer to page 97: last setting, on/off.

Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 98: last setting, on/off.

Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 69.

Locking the vehicle, refer to page 39: after a brief period or after starting to drive.

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Compartment in the center armrest. Trunk lid. Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the driver's door lock*. Via the door handles*. Via the button in the trunk lid*. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote control: Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.

Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.

The alarm system*, refer to page 42, is armed or disarmed.

Seite 35

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system.

If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap and the compartment in the center armrest remain unlocked. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button:"

4. Select the desired function: "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle.

"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the re mote control.

The side windows and the rear window are fully opened. With Comfort Access*, the remote control can be used to open the convertible top when in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Press and hold the button on the re mote control until the convertible top is

fully opened and the convertible top well storage cover is fully closed.

Danger of pinching Monitor the opening process to ensure

that no one becomes trapped; otherwise, inju ries may result.

Releasing the button stops the motion. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the mo tion of the convertible top. After a short period, the convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are lowered slowly. The convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are not locked. Press the button again until the convertible top operation is completed.

Seite 36

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Locking Press the button on the remote control.

Do not lock from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Convenient closing* With Comfort Access*, the remote control can be used to close the convertible top, the side windows, and the rear window when in the vi cinity of the vehicle.

Hold down the remote control button until the closing operation is completed.

The convertible top, the side windows, and the rear window close.

Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that

no one becomes trapped.

Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the motion. After a short period, the convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are lowered slowly. The convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are not locked. Press the button again until the convertible top operation is completed.

Switching on the interior lamps, courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps

Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode* You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature

Briefly press the button on the remote control.

The duration can be set in the Control Display.

Opening the trunk lid Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release.

The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first. To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the remote control into the cargo area. The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma

tion signals. "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" "Flash when lock/unlock"

Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.

Seite 37

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that

the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back.

The adjustment procedure is interrupted: When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer

ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.

Activating the setting 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Last seat position auto."

Malfunction If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the door lock using the key.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S. LX8766E. LX8CAS.

LX8CAS2. MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer

ence, and this device must accept any interference re

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Do not lock from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Remove the key before pulling the door handle

Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.

In some country-specific versions, the alarm system* is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.

Seite 38

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the driver's door.

Locking the doors and trunk lid at once* In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be locked via the door lock. To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas senger door.

3. Lock the vehicle. Lock the driver's door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the door from the outside.

The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.

Opening and closing: from the inside

Unlocking and opening* Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle. The doors and the trunk lid are locked

or unlocked when the doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.

"Lock after start. to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Hotel function With the hotel function, the compartment in the center armrest and the trunk lid is separately latched and decoupled by the central locking system.

Seite 39

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Compartment in the center armrest and trunk lid locked, arrow 1.

Compartment in the center armrest and trunk lid un locked, arrow 2.

Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. There fore, the compartment in the center armrest and the trunk lid are locked and decoupled from the central locking system. If the compartment in the center armrest is locked, it is not possible to open the trunk lid. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked us ing valet service. Unlock or lock the compartment in the center armrest with a key. Hand over remote control without the key.

Doors Automatic Soft Closing* To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Trunk lid Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening.

Opening from the outside

Press on the top half of the BMW emblem. Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second and re lease.

The trunk lid cannot be opened if the convertible top is not fully opened or closed.

Opening from the inside Push the button in the driver's footwell.

If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if it is not locked.

Closing

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Seite 40

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Locking the vehicle*

Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. The vehicle is locked completely.

Emergency unlocking*

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks.

Comfort Access* The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Convenient closing. Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. Starting the engine.

Functional requirements There are no external sources of interfer

ence nearby. To lock the vehicle, the remote control must

be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the remote

control is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access.

Unlocking

Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre sponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con

Seite 41

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle.

Convenient closing Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and hold. In addition to locking, the convertible top, the side windows, and the rear window close as well. Press the area, arrow 2, and hold until the con vertible top is fully closed.

Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that

no one becomes trapped.

Releasing the area, arrow 2, stops the motion. After a short period, the convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are lowered slowly. The convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are not locked. Press the area, arrow 2, again until the convertible top op eration is completed.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press on the top half of the BMW emblem on the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use a key in the door lock. To subsequently start the engine, hold the re mote control against the marked area on the steering column, refer to page 33.

Alarm system* The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid. Movements in the vehicle: interior motion

sensor, refer to page 43. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.

Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning system. By flashing the high beams.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock*, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country-specific versions.

Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened using the remote control, even if the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release.

After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again by the alarm system. The haz ard warning system flashes once. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Panic mode* Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

Seite 42

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the

remote control with you, pull on the door handle.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. The interior motion sensor is not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine is started, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensor The interior is monitored to the height of the seat cushions. The alarm system is armed together with the interior motion sensor even when the

convertible top is open. Falling objects such as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol lowing situations: In automatic car washes In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote control twice in succession.

The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windows General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves.

Closing the windows when driving To close the side windows when driving,

first close the rear windows or all four windows at the same time; otherwise, the windows may not close tightly at high speeds.

Seite 43

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Opening individually

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.

Pressing again stops the motion.

Closing individually Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 42, with Com fort Access*.

Opening/closing together

Press the switch to the resistance point. All side windows open while the switch is being pressed.

Similarly, the windows close while the switch is being pulled.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. All side windows open automatically. Pressing again stops the motion. Similarly, the windows are automatically closed when the switch is pulled past the resistance point.

Rear window

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The rear window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The rear window opens automatically. Pressing again stops the motion.

The rear window opens and closes automati cally when the convertible top is opened or closed.

Closing Pull the switch. The rear window closes while the switch

is being held.

Pinch protection If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted. The window reopens slightly. The rear window is not equipped with pinch pro tection.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other

Seite 44

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

Window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

Convertible top General information The convertible top can be opened or closed at speeds up to approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of approx. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is being moved, the convertible top move ment stops. Tips about the convertible top: If possible, close the convertible top when

the vehicle is parked. A closed convertible top protects it from weather-related dam age and to some extent from theft.

Event when the convertible top is closed, only store valuables in the locked cargo area.

At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the passenger compartment cause the conver tible top to begin to flatten. Increase the amount of air via the automatic climate con trol so that no vacuum is produced in the ve hicle.

Notes The trunk lid cannot be opened if the convertible top is not fully opened or closed.

Safety information about the convertible top

With temperatures below +14 /-10 do not open the convertible top; otherwise damages could result.

Do not leave the open convertible top in the convertible top well longer than one day while the top is still wet; otherwise, damage could result due to moisture.

The convertible top pivots up during open ing and closing. When the top is moved, e.g. in garages, make sure that there is a mini mum height of 79 inches/2 meters; other wise, it damages may result.

Do not place any objects on the convertible top, otherwise, they could fall and cause damage or injuries.

When the rollover protection system is ex tended, do not under any circumstances move the convertible top.

Always open or close the convertible top completely. Convertible top and convertible top well storage cover are locked in the final positions. Driving with the convertible tope or convertible top well storage cover un locked can result in damage.

Do not reach into the convertible top mech anism during the opening and closing oper ation. Keep children away from the opening path of the convertible top, otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Seite 45

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

When the convertible top is opened during driving, be alert to traffic; otherwise, it may result in an accident. If possible, do not move the convertible top while driving in reverse because rearward vision is severely im paired while the convertible top is in motion. During windy conditions, do not operate the convertible top while driving. Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, ve hicle damage may occur.

Do not attach any roof carrier systems; oth erwise, an accident may occur.

Functional requirements The ignition or radio ready state must be switched on. It is not possible to start the engine and operate the convertible top simultaneously. When the engine is started, the convertible top movement is briefly interrupted. Under the following conditions, the convertible top movement cannot be moved and a Check Control message is displayed. Cargo area partition is flipped up. Trunk lid is open. External temperature is too low. Vehicle system too low. Convertible top drive is overheating. Movement of the convertible top not al

lowed because of national regulations. Vehicle speed is too high.

Before opening and closing Follow the safety instructions for the con

vertible top. Make sure that the cargo area partition in the

cargo area is folded down. Make sure that the cargo does not push

against the cargo area partition from below. Make sure that the trunk lid is closed.

Convertible top switch

1 Switch 2 LEDs

Opening and closing from the inside In order to protect the battery, move the con vertible top only when the engine is running if possible. Before closing the convertible top, remove any foreign objects from the windshield frame; oth erwise, closing may be prevented. Press and hold the switch. The con

vertible top opens while the switch is being pressed.

Pull the switch and hold it. The con vertible top closes while the switch

is being pulled. Push or pull switch until the convertible top is completely open or closed and the end of the procedure is indicated by a corresponding Check Control message. Always make sure that the convertible top well storage cover is com pletely closed. If the convertible top is com pletely open or closed, convertible top and con vertible top well storage cover are latched. The side windows and the rear window go down when the convertible top control switch is pulled or pushed.

LEDs Left LED lights up green: convertible top is

opened or closed. If the operation is com pleted, the LED goes out and a correspond ing Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 46

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Right LED flashes red after the switch is re leased: operating sequence has not yet con cluded.

Right LED comes on red when the switch is pulled: cargo area partition is flipped up, trunk lid is not closed or there is a malfunc tion. Convertible top cannot be moved.

In addition to the red LED, a check control mes sage is displayed.

Interruption Always open/close the convertible top completely

A convertible top that is not opened or closed completely is not locked and represents a haz ard.

The convertible top movement is interrupted if the switch is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction using the switch. If there is a longer interruption, convertible top and convertible top well storage cover remain approx. 10 minutes in the current position be fore they slowly go down. The convertible top and the convertible top well storage cover are not locked. Operate switch again until the con vertible operation is terminated.

Convenient operation* from outside When equipped with Comfort Access* the con vertible top can also be operated from outside: Convenient opening with remote operation,

refer to page 36. Convenient closing with the remote control,

refer to page 37. Convenient closing via the door handles, re

fer to page 42.

Cargo area partition

Fold down cargo area partition in the back so that the convertible top can be opened. Fold down cargo area partition in the front in or der to enlarge the cargo area space when the convertible top is closed.

Manually close convertible top If there is a defect, the convertible top can be manually closed. Two persons are necessary to do this.

Do not manually open convertible top and close it manually only in emergency situa

tions. Do not manually open the convertible top. The convertible top well storage cover cannot latch if there is an electrical defect and would open during driving. Manually close the convertible top only in emer gency situations. Damage can result from improper handling.

Tools Tools for manually closing the convertible top are located in the insert of the rear seat backrest under the first aid kit.

1. Remove insert, refer to page 249. 2. Remove the first aid kit. 3. Remove tools.

Seite 47

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

1 Convertible top tool 2 Adapter 3 Rear window tool

Before closing 1. Open trunk lid, refer to page 40.

Depending on the reason for the defect, it may be the case that the trunk lid cannot be opened. Then the convertible top cannot be manually closed.

2. Remove the two large caps from the trim. If necessary, use a screwdriver to help with this.

3. Unlock convertible top well storage cover. To do this, pull on the right cap and simul taneously slightly raise the front right con vertible top well storage cover in front of the rear window. Proceed accordingly on the left side.

4. When the convertible top is closed man ually, the trunk lid can no longer be opened. Remove urgently needed items from the cargo area and close the trunk lid.

5. Lower the side window and the rear window completely. If the rear window cannot be lowered elec trically, it must be lowered manually.

Manually lowering rear window The spindle for lowering the rear window is lo cated in front of the rear window in the center beneath the convertible top well storage cover.

1. Have a second person slightly raise the con vertible top well storage cover, arrow 1, and hold it.

2. Insert the rear window tool through the fun nel-shaped opening into the spindle, ar row 2. Turn the spindle clockwise, arrow 3, until the rear window is all the way down.

Lifting out convertible top Only close the convertible top with two people

Carry out the following steps with the aid of a second person and with the doors open; other wise, it may result in damage to the convertible top.

Seite 48

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

1. Grasp the convertible top well storage cover on both sides, swing it up until it reaches its limit position and hold it in place.

2. Remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame. If necessary, use a screwdriver to help with this.

3. Insert the convertible top tool into the con vertible top lock. Turn the convertible top tool approx. one half turn clockwise to open the convertible top lock. Be careful not to damage the convertible top fabric. Remove the convertible top tool.

4. On both sides of the vehicle, grasp the front edge of the convertible top frame with one hand. With the other hand, grasp the end of the convertible top on the bottom edge.

Keep the convertible top well storage cover open, e.g. with your shoulder.

5. Lift out the convertible top and the conver tible top ends on both sides simultaneously and swing it forward. When you do this, make sure that the convertible top ends do not push against other parts.

Seite 49

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

6. With the cover ends placed high, close the convertible top well storage cover.

7. Fold down the two convertible top ends on the convertible top well storage cover.

Lock convertible cover 1. Insert the cover tool on the front edge of the

convertible top frame into the convertible top lock.

2. Turn the cover tool counterclockwise until the front convertible top frame is locked with the front windshield frame. Simultaneously, have a second person push from the outside toward the center on the front windshield frame.

3. Insert the convertible top tool with the long end into the adapter from the tool kit.

4. In the rear, raise the inner lining of the con vertible top. Place the adapter on the red- marked pin of the convertible top mecha nism.

5. Push the rear convertible top end down and simultaneously have a second person push the tool all the way up to the stop. In this way, the convertible top end is pushed against the convertible top well storage cover and locked. Proceed accordingly on the other end of the convertible top.

6. If possible, close the rear window electri cally. The rear window cannot be manually closed.

7. Have the convertible top checked by the service center.

Wind deflector* The concept The wind deflector reduces the air movement in the passenger compartment when driving with the top down.

Seite 50

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Installation 1. Remove wind deflector from the protective

jacket and unfold it.

2. Press the upper and lower parts together until the latch engages.

3. Push out the right retaining pin until the latch engages and flip out the two rear retaining pins.

4. Install the wind deflector on the vehicle with the right retaining pin and the two rear ones in the corresponding openings.

5. Push the left retaining pin into the provided opening until it latches.

6. Flip up the top half of the wind deflector.

Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far back

Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far back with the wind deflector installed if the seat is to be moved all the way back. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be damaged.

Removing Proceed in reverse sequence.

Seite 51

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

To release the two lateral retaining pins, pull the corresponding handle forward a little and them pull it to the side.

Folding up

On the left side, pull the handle of the retaining pin on the wind deflector all the way back and release the latch. Fold in top and bottom part.

Seite 52

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Op en

in g

an d

cl os

in g

Adjusting Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 56. Head restraints, refer to page 57. Airbags, refer to page 88.

Seats Adjusting

General information Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving. The seat could respond with unexpected move ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Do not incline the backrest on the front passen ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.

The seat setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automati cally retrieved if this function, refer to page 37, was activated.

At a glance

1 Active seat* 2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory* 3 Backrest width* 4 Lumbar support* 5 Backrest, head restraint* 6 Shoulder support* 7 Forward/back, height, tilt* 8 Thigh support*

Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back.

2. Height.

Seite 53

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

Thigh support*

Multifunctional seat*

Adjust the position using the lever.

Lumbar support* The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/decreased.

Press the upper/lower section of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/down.

Backrest width*

Change the width of the backrest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

Shoulder support*

Also supports the back in the shoulder area: Results in a relaxed seating position. Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Seite 54

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ad ju

st in

g

Active seat* Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.

Press the button. The LED lights up.

Front seat heating*

Switching on Press the button once for each temper ature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. The temperature may be reduced or seat heat ing may be switched off entirely to save battery power.

Temperature distribution* The heating action in the seat cushion and back rest can be distributed in different ways.

1. "Climate" 2. "Seat heating distribution"

3. Select the required seat.

4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution.

Front active seat ventilation* The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans. The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if the vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures.

Switching on Press the button once for each ventila tion level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit.

After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Seite 55

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Notes Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear

a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im pact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka ble objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for the driver's and front passenger seat

The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Seite 56

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ad ju

st in

g

Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap proximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function Do not use seat or head restraint cov

ers. Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

on the head restraints. Only attach accessories approved by BMW

to the seat or head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the personal safety of the occupants will be endangered.

Adjusting the height*

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to the back of the head*

Forward: pull. Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.

Adjusting the side extensions*

Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.

Seite 57

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Entering the rear Note

Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving away, fold back and lock the

backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.

Unlocking the backrest

Pull the lever and fold the backrest forward.

Changing the seat position

To change the entry area: Press and hold the button until the seat has

moved to the desired position. Releasing the button stops the motion.

Press the button briefly. The seat automat ically moves to the respective end position. Pressing again stops the motion.

Folding back and locking the backrest After entering the rear, fold the backrest back and lock it.

Press the button. The seat moves to its original position. Pressing again stops the motion.

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory* General information

Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and re trieved for each remote control. The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident.

Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically.

Seite 58

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ad ju

st in

g

The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig

nition. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until

the adjustment procedure is completed.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Open or close the door or trunk lid. Press a button on the remote control. Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor* 3 Fold in and out*

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see

in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

The mirror setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use. When the vehicle is un locked via the remote control, the position is au tomatically retrieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.

Storing positions* Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 58.

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor* When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage transmission position R.

Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger's side mirror position.

Fold in and out* Press the button.

Seite 59

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de pending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear view mirror, refer to page 60.

Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect

From behind when driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature*

Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror. For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel General information

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Seite 60

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ad ju

st in

g

Adjusting

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections.

Storing the position Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 58.

Assistance getting in and out The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.

Steering wheel heating*

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 61

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Transporting children safely The right place for children Note

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in jury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 89.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.

Installing child restraint fixing systems Notes

Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto matically, refer to page 89.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest po sition to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height after this.

Backrest width* Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest

Seite 62

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Tr an

sp or

tin g

ch ild

re n

sa fe

ly

width again and do not call up a memory posi tion.

Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren.

Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix ing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; oth erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fix ing system is resting snugly against the back rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system, pull the belt away from the child re straint fixing system.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer

to the operating instructions of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

For Canadian customers Only The following statement is required by Trans port Canada:

Seite 63

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child re straint system, nor a booster cushion, requirer ing the use of a tether strap can be properly se cured in the vehicle.

Seite 64

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Tr an

sp or

tin g

ch ild

re n

sa fe

ly

Driving Start/Stop button The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Automatic transmission*: the en gine starts if the brake is de

pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed. Manual transmission: the engine starts if the clutch is depressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on Automatic transmission*: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. The ignition switches off automatically: When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams

are switched on. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition off Automatic transmission*: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Transmission position P with the ignition off

When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.

When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system, the ignition switches off auto matically.

Radio ready state Activate radio ready state: When the ignition is switched off: press ON/

OFF button on the radio. When the engine is running: press START/

STOP button. Some electronic systems/power consumers re main ready for operation. Radio ready state switches off automatically: After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the central

locking system.

Seite 65

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Starting the engine General information

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten tial source of danger. Before leaving the car with the engine running, set the parking brake and place the transmission in position P or neutral to prevent the car from moving.

Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod erate engine speeds.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch and shift to neutral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Automatic transmission*

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a cer tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Engine stop General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the windows and injure them selves.

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, heed the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 254.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.

Automatic transmission*

Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the ve

hicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Seite 66

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng

Parking brake The concept The parking brake is primarily intended to pre vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels. In cars with automatic transmission*: The parking brake can be set manually or auto matically: Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch. Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.

Setting Pull the switch. The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up in red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

While driving Use while driving: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the button is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.

Releasing Manual transmission: Press the switch while the brake or clutch is pressed.

Automatic transmission*: Press the switch while the brake is pressed or transmission po sition P is engaged. The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.

Automatic Hold*

The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away.

Seite 67

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

For your safety Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the parking brake is set: The engine is switched off. A door is opened and driver's safety belt is

unbuckled. The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill

using the parking brake. The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Before driving away: Release the parking brake manually. Reactivate Automatic Hold.

Leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Activating This function can be activated when the driver's door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, or while driving.

Press the button. The LED and the letters AUTO H light

up.

The indicator lamp lights up. Automatic Hold is activated.

Deactivating Press the button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.

When the parking brake, refer to page 67, is set manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto matically.

Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto matically secured against rolling when it stops.

The indicator lamp lights up in green. Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off. The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Before driving into a car wash Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the

parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.

Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the en gine is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is coast ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti vated.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.

Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it.

Seite 68

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the re sistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

High beams, arrow 1. Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro

zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

Switching on

Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Seite 69

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Rain sensor

The concept The time between wipes is controlled automat ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor

Press the button on the wiper lever. When activated, the wipers move over the wind shield once. The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam age could be caused by undesired wiper activa tion.

Rain sensor sensitivity

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlamps*

Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Seite 70

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated* whenever the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and are ready for operation.

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep

it away from sources of ignition. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the instructions on the container.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser voir. Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec ommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio.

Capacity Approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters

Manual transmission Shifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gear When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance needs to be overcome.

Seite 71

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Automatic transmission with Steptronic* Transmission positions

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, position P is engaged automatically.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: After the engine is switched off, if the car is

in radio ready state, refer to page 65, or if the ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, and if position R or D is engaged.

If the ignition is switched off and position N is engaged.

If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging the transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen

gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;

otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Depress the brake until you start driv ing

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Press the Unlock button to: Engage R. Shift out of P.

Seite 72

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng

Engaging P

Press button P.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the sport program

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a perform ance-oriented driving style.

Activating the M/S manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., M1. To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: press the selector lever back

ward. The transmission only shifts up or down if the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the

engine speed is too high, the transmission does not shift down. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Sport automatic transmission*

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans mission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the system switches back into automatic mode if the selec tor lever is in D. Shift up: pull right shift paddle. Shift down: pull left shift paddle. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis played, for instance, P.

Seite 73

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Displays Instrument cluster At a glance

1 Fuel gauge 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps 4 Tachometer 5 Oil temperature

6 External temperature 7 Electronic displays 8 Miles, trip miles 9 Clock 10 Display/reset miles

Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Notes on refueling, refer to page 226.

Range After the reserve range is reached: A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.

The remaining range is shown on the computer.

When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when corners are taken rapidly, engine functions are not ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/

50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.

Seite 74

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Di sp

la ys

Displaying the cruising range 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators"

The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

Normal operating tempera ture: the pointer is in the mid dle or in the left half of the temperature display.

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem perature end. A Check Control message is displayed in addition.

Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be come too hot, a Check Control message is dis played. Check the coolant level, refer to page 239.

External temperature

External temperature warning If the display drops to +37 / +3 , a signal sounds. A Check Control message is dis played. There is the increased danger of

ice.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 ,

there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel con sumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmen tally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators"

Seite 75

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

The bar display for the current fuel consumption is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recovery The energy of motion of the ve hicle is converted to electrical en ergy while coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be low ered.

Odometer and trip odometer Odometer, arrow 1. Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Display/reset miles Press the knob. When the ignition is switched

off, the time, external temper ature and odometer are dis played.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

Time The time is displayed at the bot tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time format, refer to page 79.

Date The date is displayed in the in strument cluster. Setting the date and date format, refer to page 80.

Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept

The following can be operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel: Current audio source. Redial on telephone*. Activation of the voice activation system*.

Activating a list and creating the setting

Press a button on the right side of the steering wheel or turn the thumbwheel to activate the re quired list. Create the setting using the thumbwheel.

Computer Indication in the info display

The information from the com puter is shown in the Info display in the instrument cluster.

Seite 76

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Di sp

la ys

Calling up information on the info display

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig nal lever calls up the following information on the info display: Range. Average fuel consumption. Average speed. Date*. Time of arrival*

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Distance to destination* When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Arrow view of navigation system* When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the com puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display"

3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.

Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine stopped do not enter into the calculation.

Resetting average values Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination* The distance remaining to the destination is dis played if a destination is entered in the naviga tion system* before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically.

Seite 77

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Time of arrival* The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en tered in the navigation system* before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/ 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed"

3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

Resetting values The average fuel consumption and average speed can be reset. Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Trip computer There are two types of computer. "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary. "Trip computer": the values provide an over

view of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Display on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Seite 78

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Di sp

la ys

Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" 3. "Cons." or "Speed"

4. "Yes"

Gear shift indicator* The concept The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear in the current driving situation. Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displays

1 Fuel efficient gear is engaged 2 Shift up to fuel efficient gear 3 Shift down to fuel efficient gear

Settings on the Control Display Time

Setting the time zone* 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.

Setting the time 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.

5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes

are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored.

Seite 79

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Date

Setting the date 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog* Voice dialog for the voice activation system*, refer to page 26.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis tance and temperature:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display:

Seite 80

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Di sp

la ys

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set.

5. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Service requirements Display

The driving distance or the time to the next service is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on. The current service require

ments can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re quest, refer to page 218.

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a le gally mandated inspection is approaching. Please make a service appointment.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. " Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Create the settings. 7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request* Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 81

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display*. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Dis play.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Addition information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. The supplementary text of ur gent messages is displayed automatically.

It is shown on the Control Display.

Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about the Check Control message in the integrated owner's manual.

"Service request" Contact the service partner.

"Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared un til the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis played again automatically.

Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 82

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Di sp

la ys

3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis played again after the ignition is switched off.

Seite 83

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Lamps At a glance

1 Rear fog lamps* 2 Front fog lamps* 3 Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light

control* / high-beam assistant* / welcome lamps / daytime running lights*

4 Lamps off / daytime running lights* 5 Parking lamps / daytime running lights* 6 Low beams / welcome lamps / high-beam

assistant* 7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 85.

Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked.

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s"

4. Set the duration.

Seite 84

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

La m

ps

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi light or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually un der these conditions.

Daytime running lights* With the ignition switched on, the daytime run ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position .

Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Adaptive light control* The concept Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

Controls

Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on. The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive light control directs light towards the front pas senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active.

Self-leveling headlights The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the light distribution to the contours of the road. The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de pressions to increase visibility.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 85

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos sible.

High-beam Assistant* The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys tem automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the High-beam Assistant

1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar

row. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the lights are switched on, the

high beams are switched on and off automati cally. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man ually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres ence of highly reflective signs.

At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

Seite 86

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

La m

ps

Camera

The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear.

Fog lamps Front fog lamps* The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 85, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Instrument lighting Adjusting

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.

Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati cally.

The brightness of some of these lamps is influ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lamps on and off Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. To clear this setting: press the button.

Reading lamps Press the button.

Seite 87

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Safety Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Side airbag 4 Knee airbags

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest, lap, and head area.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is triggered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instru ments and mobile phones.

Seite 88

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack ets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag; otherwise, inju ries can occur if the airbags are deployed.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; oth erwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un desired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

When the ignition is switch on, the warn ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op

erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning In radio ready state, the warning lamp does

not come on. The warning lamp lights up continuously.

When there is a malfunction, have the air bag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as ex pected in the event of an accident despite cor responding severity of the accident.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated ac cordingly.

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica

Seite 89

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or

other items to the front passenger seat un less they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Do not place any objects on the front pas senger seat.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passen ger side are not activated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The

airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front pas senger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Con trol Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all the way.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.

Seite 90

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

Rollover protection system The concept The rollover protection system is activated dur ing an accident or a critical driving situation, when there is extreme tilt with respect to the longitudinal axis or when there is loss of ground contact. The safety frames located behind the rear headrests extend within fractions of a sec ond. In addition to the rollover bracket integrated in the front windshield frame, the rollover protec tion system guarantees the required head clear ance of all vehicle occupants.

Maintaining movement space Always keep the movement space of the

rollover protection system clear. Otherwise, there may be damage or injuries when the roll over protection system is triggered.

In less severe accidents, the secured safety belt and, depending on the severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and airbag restraint system provide protection.

Triggered rollover protection system After deployment or damage After deployment of the rollover protec

tion system or in the event of damage, have the system checked and replaced. Have this work performed only by your service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Do not move convertible top When the rollover protection system is ex

tended, do not move the convertible top. Oth erwise, damages or injuries may result.

If the rollover protection system was not placed under any stress after an automatic triggering, it can be pushed back by hand, e.g. to close the convertible top. Three people are necessary for this.

1. Push the lever to the side and hold it in this position.

2. Push down the safety frame. 3. Release lever. 4. Hold down the safety frame. 5. Proceed likewise with the second safety

frame. 6. Close the convertible top

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or after deployment

Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the system scrapped by your serv ice center. Non-professional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed when there is a malfunction.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM* The concept The tire inflation pressure is measured in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset when the in flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the

Seite 91

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pres sure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures. The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: For a mounted wheel without TPM electron

ics. When the TPM is disturbed by other sys

tems or devices with the same radio fre quency.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM" The status is displayed.

Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires. A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if this is indicated by the TPM

Wheels, green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure

in several tires. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last.

A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem is being reset.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: TPM is being reset. Disturbance by systems or devices with the

same radio frequency. Malfunction.

For Canadian models: additional information The status display additionally shows the cur rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera tures. When correcting the tire inflation pressures, note the following: The tire pressure increases as the tire temper ature increases. Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres sure when the tire is at the ambient temperature. Compare the displayed tire temperature with the external temperature in the instrument clus ter.

Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset"

Seite 92

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed. After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla tion pressures are applied as set values. The re setting process is completed automatically dur ing driving. The tires are shown in green and "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto matically. If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are displayed in yellow.

Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg ular tires* or run-flat tires*. Run-flat tires, refer to page 234, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires* 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not

have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them re placed if necessary.

Run-flat tires* You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/ 80 km.

Seite 93

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not con tinue driving, and contact your service center.

Message when the system was not reset A Check Control message is displayed. The system detected a wheel change but was not reset. Warnings regarding the current tire inflation pressure are not reliable. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system.

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat

tire can be detected. Display in the following situations:

A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if necessary.

Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys tem again.

Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la bel, you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-in flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating prop erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then re

Seite 94

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

main continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor* The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires. It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In itialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla tion pressure regularly.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration. When driving with snow chains*.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detec tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con firming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains*.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

Seite 95

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg ular tires* or run-flat tires*. Run-flat tires, refer to page 234, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires* 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire.

Run-flat tires* You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have

been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/ 80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not con tinue driving, and contact your service center.

Seite 96

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

Lane departure warning* The concept This system issues a warning at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about to leave the lane on roads with lane markings. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated. Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane marking

was detected and warnings can be issued.

Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning The warning ends: Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. When returning to your own lane. When braking hard. When using the turn signal.

System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,

diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.

When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When the lane markings are covered by ob

jects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

Seite 97

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat. This causes the lane departure warning to be come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button.

Camera

The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear.

Active Blind Spot Detection* The concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.

The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situa tions described above. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.

Seite 98

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit ical zone.

System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi cle.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat. This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Dirty or icy bumper. Stickers on the bumper. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer

ence, and this device must accept any interference re

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Seite 99

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Brake force display* The concept

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 100

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sa fe

ty

Driving stability control systems Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak ing. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away with

out delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driving

without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward momen tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is limited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un der the following special circumstances:

Seite 101

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.

When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces.

When driving with snow chains.

Adaptive Drive* The concept Adaptive Drive* includes the following systems: Dynamic Drive, refer to page 102 Dynamic Damping Control, refer to

page 102 The system increases driving stability and driv ing comfort.

Dynamic Drive* The concept Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Driving stability and driving comfort are in creased under all driving conditions. The system utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driving situa tions.

Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control, refer to page 103.

SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.

NORMAL Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.

Dynamic Damping Control* The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.

Programs The system offers three different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control, refer to page 103.

SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb ers for greater driving agility.

NORMAL Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and SPORT programs.

COMFORT Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort.

Integral Active Steering* The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering. Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment as a function of the speed. At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., steering becomes more direct. The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas ingly reduced.

Seite 102

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng st

ab ili

ty co

nt ro

l s ys

te m

s

The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels. In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, e.g., when braking where road conditions differ on the left and right sides of the vehicle.

Initializing In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi alize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

1. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears.

2. Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steer ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle.

Using snow chains Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated when using snow chains, refer to page 235.

Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control, refer to page 103.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active Steering for greater driving agility.

NORMAL Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle re sponds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range.

The stability-enhancing intervention may be de activated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.

Dynamic Driving Control* The concept Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro grams are available for this purpose; they can be activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control buttons.

Operating the programs

Press the button Program

DSC OFF TRACTION

SPORT+ SPORT NORMAL COMFORT*

For Adaptive Drive* or Dynamic Damper Con trol*, the lower button is labeled with COM FORT.

Automatic program change The system automatically switches to NORMAL in the following situations: Failure of Integral Active Steering*. Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*. The vehicle has a flat tire.

DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering* system are only performed by the rear axle steering.

Seite 103

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC OFF Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer. The DSC system is switched off.

Deactivating DSC OFF Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis played in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated.

TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating TRACTION Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the tachom

eter. The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter lights up.

Deactivating TRACTION Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION is activated.

SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus pension during limited driving stabilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.

Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer

and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in strument cluster.

Indicator/warning lamps SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for greater driving agility with maximum driving sta bilization. The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer.

Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 105, the sport program can be set to individual specifications. After the sport program is activated, select "Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed panel and configure the program. Optionally, the sport program can be configured before it is activated:

Seite 104

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng st

ab ili

ty co

nt ro

l s ys

te m

s

1. "Settings" 2. "SPORT mode"

3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when the sport program is activated.

NORMAL For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta bilization.

Activating NORMAL Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer

goes out.

In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 103.

COMFORT* Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabilization.

Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until COM FORT appears in the tachometer.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected program The selected program is dis played in the tachometer.

Program selection

Pressing the button displays a list of the select able programs.

Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display. To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Display driving settings"

Seite 105

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Driving comfort Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable con

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on

a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

Controls

Buttons at a glance

1 System on/off, interrupt 2 Resume speed 3 Store speed* 4 Store, maintain/change speed

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted,

actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Press the button.

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed. Transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability.

Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 107. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Seite 106

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Change, maintain speed The rocker switch can be pressed while inter rupted to maintain and store the current speed.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other wise, there is the danger of an accident occur ring.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it accelerates or deceler ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re sistance point causes the vehicle to accel erate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed Press the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Display of desired speed 2 Indicator lamp 3 Brief status display

Desired speed Display in the speedometer:

The marking lights up in green: the system is active.

The marking lights up in or ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display Brief display in the speedometer:

Selected desired speed

If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad equate to operate the system.

PDC Park Distance Control* The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the backup camera*, refer to page 110, can be switched on. PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or behind your vehicle are indicated with: Signal tones. Visual display.

Seite 107

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the front* sensors and the two rear cor

ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/

1.50 m.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With low objects. With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.

False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages. In heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running.

Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for

ward. Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv

ing forward. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 108

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object becomes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds: If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen sors.

If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, refer to page 165. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis play before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display.

2. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Zoom view* On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle is shown enlarged.

Forward gear or transmission position D en gaged: front area of the vehicle.

Reverse gear or transmission position R en gaged: rear area of the vehicle.

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

On the Control Display, the areas in front of and behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

To ensure full operability:

Seite 109

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using a pressure washer, keep the

sprayer moving and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm from the sensors.

Surround View* The concept Surround View includes the following systems: Backup camera, refer to page 110. Side View, refer to page 114. Top View, refer to page 112. It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering and on blind driveways and intersections.

Backup camera* The concept The backup camera provides assistance in park ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup camera.

Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges

may not be detected by the backup camera.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.

Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out:

After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for ward.

Above approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving forward.

Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 112.

Assistance functions

Functional requirement The backup camera is switched on. The trunk lid is fully closed.

Pathway lines

Can be shown in the backup camera image when in transmission position R.

Seite 110

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer ing wheel movements.

Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 111.

Turning circle lines

Can be shown in the backup camera image. Show the course of the smallest possible

turning circle on a level road. Only one turning circle line is displayed

when the steering wheel is turned. Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 111.

Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle

lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Obstacle marking

Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the backup camera image.

Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.

Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

Showing the parking aid lines "Parking aid lines"

Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Seite 111

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With the backup camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With the backup camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Camera

The camera lens is located under the BMW em blem of the trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 257.

Top View* The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneuver ing. The area around the doors and the road area

around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.

Capturing the image The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The range equals: approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side. approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex terior mirrors are detected early.

System limits Top View cannot be used in the following situa tions: With a door open. With the trunk lid open. With an exterior mirror folded in. In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the cameras.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.

Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for

ward. Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv

ing forward. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Seite 112

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 113.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View is ac tivated.

If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to Top View:

"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via iDrive With Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With Top View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With Top View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines The static, red turning circle line shows the

space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.

The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space actually needed to the side of the vehicle. The pathway line is dependent on the cur rent steering angle and is continuously ad justed with the steering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

Seite 113

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Cameras

The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 257.

Side View* The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the traffic situation on each side.

System limits The maximum recording range of the camera is 330 ft/100 m.

Display The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re sult from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the Side View cameras.

Switching off automatically System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/ 15 km/h. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

Display on the Control Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness With the Side View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Seite 114

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Cameras

The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 257.

Parking assistant* The concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and accelerate or brake ac cordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control*, refer to page 107.

Personal responsibility The parking assistant does not relieve the

driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the parking procedure. Watch the parking space and parking procedure closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward ap

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Maximum distance to row of parked vehi

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Minimum length: own vehicle length plus

approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure Closed doors.

Switching on

Using the button

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The parking assistant is activated automati cally. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Seite 115

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

By engaging reverse Engage transmission position R. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol in the Control Display.

Display on the Control Display

System status

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Gray: the system is not activated. Parking space search. Blue: the system is activated. A suitable parking space was found.

The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized.

Status of the parking space search

Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.

The vehicle is parked in the parking space if the parking procedure is active.

No display: no parking space search.

Parking using the parking assistant Personal responsibility The parking assistant does not relieve the

driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the parking procedure. Watch the parking space and parking procedure closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

Check the traffic situation as well Loud sounds outside and within the vehi

cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking assistant and PDC. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident.

1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate it if necessary. The status of the parking space search is in dicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play. The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec essary.

Seite 116

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Notes The parking assistant takes control of steer

ing for as long as the symbol for active park ing appears on the display.

The system maneuvers the vehicle to posi tion it properly in smaller parking spaces, for example.

To achieve the best possible parking posi tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary.

When parking in parking spaces on the driv er's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time by: Grasping the steering wheel and steering

yourself. "Deactivate Parking Assistant" Select

the symbol on the Control Display.

Interrupting automatically The procedure is interrupted automatically: If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/

10 km/h. On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces

if necessary. If doors are open. A Check Control message is displayed.

Continuing An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued if necessary. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this.

Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: Press the button.

Switch off the ignition.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

System limits Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by the sys tem. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi

cle over or onto curbs. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle may become damaged.

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not provide assis tance in parking. In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When sensors are dirty or iced over. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads. When leaves or snow has collected in the

parking space.

Seite 117

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park ing spaces are located in the side turn signals. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using a pressure washer, keep the

sprayer moving and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm from the sensors.

Night Vision with pedestrian detection* The concept Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night vision system. An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and displays the image on the Con trol Display. The picture is a heat image. The system has an integrated pedestrian detection function that detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects

that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system.

Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver's

personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect.

For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second.

Seite 118

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Pedestrian detection

The pedestrian detection and warning system only operates in darkness and only when a heat image is displayed. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system. People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue.

Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian detection system operates within a range of ap prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.

Environmental influences can limit the availabil ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol is displayed in the heat image. This symbol disappears when the function be comes available again.

Warning of people in danger

If the system detects a person in the defined area in front of the vehicle and if there is the dan ger of a collision with this person, a warning symbol appears in the Control Display and Head-up Display*. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.

Warning area in front of the vehicle

The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas. Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle. Expanded area 2 to the right and left. The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example.

Symbols This symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the vehicle.

This symbol is displayed when a person detected in the extended area, arrow 2,

Seite 119

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

is moving from the right or left to the central area.

Display in the Head-up Display* The warning is simultaneously dis played in the Head-up Display and in the Control Display. The displayed symbol

can vary with the people detected. For people located in the central area, the distance to the person is indicated by the size of the symbol.

System limits

Basic limits System operation is limited in situations such as the following: On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves. When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. At very high external temperatures.

Limits of pedestrian detection Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de tection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image. Limited pedestrian detection: When people are fully or partially covered,

especially when their heads are covered. When people are not in an upright position,

e.g., when lying down. Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,

recumbent bicycles). After physical damage to the system, e.g.,

after an accident.

Activation/deactivation

Press the button.

Display

Settings via iDrive With Night Vision switched on:

1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec tion.

2. Press the controller. 3. Open the desired menu item.

"Brightness" "Contrast" "Pedestrian detection"

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Camera

Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper ation. The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low. The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps.

Seite 120

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Clean the lens, refer to page 257.

Head-up Display* The concept

This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information with out averting his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis play is influenced by: Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis

play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set tings.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

Display

1 Lane departure warning* 2 Active Cruise Control* 3 Desired speed 4 Navigation system* 5 Speed The collision warning*, Night Vision* pedestrian warning, or Check Control messages are dis played briefly if needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller.

The brightness is adjusted. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi tionally influenced using the instrument lighting, refer to page 87.

Seite 121

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller.

The height is adjusted. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield replaced by a service center only.

Seite 122

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Dr ivi

ng co

m fo

rt

Climate control Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left 2 Temperature, left 3 AUTO program, left 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,

left 5 Remove ice and condensation 6 Maximum cooling 7 Display 8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right 9 AUTO program, right 10 Temperature, right

11 Air distribution, right 12 Seat heating*, right55 13 Active seat ventilation*, right55 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu

lated-air mode 15 Cooling function 16 Rear window defroster 17 ALL program 18 Active seat ventilation*, left55 19 Seat heating*, left55

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell.

Footwell. Windows and footwell: driver's side only. Windows, upper body region and footwell:

driver's side only. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the conden sation sensor.

Seite 123

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem

perature are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 125, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window con densation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Convertible program When the convertible top is open, the converti ble program is activated as well. In the conver tible program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convertible top

open. In addition, the air volume is increased as the vehicle speed increases. The efficiency of the convertible program can be greatly enhanced by installing the wind deflec tor*.

Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air volume of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re

moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, additionally switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem

perature, maximum air volume and recirculated- air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re gion. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx. 32 /

0 . When the engine is running. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active.

Seite 124

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Cl im

at e

co nt

ro l

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con

trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out side air and controls the shut-off automati cally.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and

depending on the temperature setting warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, con densation water, refer to page 140, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time. The rear window defroster is only active when the rear window is closed.

ALL program Press the button. Current settings on the driver's side for

the temperature, air volume, air distribution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front pas senger side. The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side are changed.

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior.

Functional requirement Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been

switched off. Warm engine. The battery is sufficiently charged. External temperature below 77 /25 .

Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side.

is shown on the display of the automatic cli mate control. The interior temperature, air volume and air dis tribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on.

Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side.

on the display of the automatic climate control goes out.

Seite 125

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Complete system:

At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's

side. On the front passenger side:

At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the front

passenger side.

Switching on Press any button.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance of your vehicle., refer to page 241

Ventilation

Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar row 1. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.

Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar row 2.

Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3.

Adjusting the ventilation Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary. The system can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset switch-on times. It re mains switched on for 30 minutes. They can be operated via iDrive.

Parked-car ventilation Using the preset switch-on time or when oper ated directly: any external temperature. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off.

Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

Seite 126

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Cl im

at e

co nt

ro l

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.

Seite 127

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Interior equipment Integrated universal remote control* The concept This system can replace up to three different hand-held transmitters for various types of re mote-controlled equipment, such as garage doors or lighting systems. The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro grammed on one of the three memory buttons. The corresponding device can then be operated using the programmed memory button. The LED indicates that a signal is being trans mitted. When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro grams for security reasons.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob jects in the range of movement of the remote- controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the hand-held transmitter, the remote-controlled de

vice is generally compatible with the universal remote control. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet.

Programming

LED, arrow 1. Memory buttons, arrow 2.

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes. All programs of the three memory buttons, arrow 2, are cleared.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory buttons.

4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of the hand-held transmitter and the memory button of the universal remote control. The LED flashes slowly.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.

The device can be operated using the memory button with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Malfunction If the device cannot be used after repeated at tempts at programming, please check whether the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system.

Seite 128

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

In te

rio r e

qu ip

m en

t

To do so: Read the instructions of the hand-held

transmitter. Press the memory button of the universal

remote control for an extended period. If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. In this case, program the memory buttons as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters Please obtain information on synchronizing the device in the operating manual of the device be ing set up. Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec ond person.

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- controlled device.

2. Program the universal remote control as de scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec onds until the device to be adjusted is acti vated. If the device does not become activated, press and hold the button and watch the LED: If the LED lights up continuously, the

programming is completed. The device should become activated when the but ton is pressed briefly.

If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds and then lights up continuously, con tinue the programming procedure be ginning with step 4.

4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.

5. Press the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

6. Press the programmed memory button of the universal remote control three times.

The device can be operated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Reassigning individual programs 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of

approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory buttons.

3. Press the memory button of the universal remote control.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.

Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons for ap prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored programs are deleted. The programs cannot be deleted individually.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter* Manual-shift transmission: opening

Press on the cover.

Seite 129

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Automatic transmission*: opening

Press the button.

Emptying Take out the insert.

Lighter Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote con trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn them selves.

Connecting electrical devices Sockets* The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 Watt at 12 V. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Manual transmission: center console

Press on the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.

Automatic transmission*: center console

Press on the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.

Center armrest

Remove the cover.

Seite 130

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

In te

rio r e

qu ip

m en

t

Ski bag* Capacity The ski bag makes it possible to transport two pairs of skis up to a length of 6 ft/2.10 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag 1. Pull the release and remove the insert from

the front.

2. Lay out the ski bag. 3. Press button in the cargo area, open tail

board and attach to the rear wall via mag netic holder.

4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the sharp edges of the skis. If necessary, open the ski bag zipper to ease loading or to dry the ski bag.

5. Tighten the retaining strap.

Securing the ski bag Secure the ski bag by tightening the re

taining strap; otherwise, the contents could present a source of danger to the passengers, for example during braking or evasive maneu vers.

Stowing the ski bag Proceed in the reverse order of loading. When replacing the insert, place both pins into the rail at the bottom and press the insert back in place. Ensure that the rear seat backrest up holstery is not damaged.

Seite 131

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Storage compartments Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior: Glove compartment on the front passenger

side, refer to page 132. Storage compartment on the center con

sole: manual transmission. Storage compartment in the center armrest,

refer to page 132. Compartments in the doors. Pockets* on the backrests of the front seats. Net* in the front passenger footwell.

Glove compartment Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.

Closing Fold up the cover.

USB interface for data transfer

Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33. Music collection, refer to page 180. Observe the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con

nector into the USB interface. Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface. Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Center armrest Opening A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.

Press the buttons next to the lock.

Seite 132

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

St or

ag e

co m

pa rtm

en ts

Locking the storage compartment

The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately se cure the trunk lid, refer to page 39, for example.

After the storage compartment is locked, the re mote control can be handed out without the integrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at a hotel. This prevents access to the storage compart ment and to the cargo area.

Connection for an external audio device

This can be used to connect an external audio device, such as a CD or MP3 player.

AUX-IN port, refer to page 184. USB audio interface*, refer to page 185.

Cupholders Notes

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam age.

Manual transmission: center console

A cupholder is located on the center console.

Manual transmission: center armrest

A cupholder is located in the center armrest compartment. To open: press the buttons next to the lock.

Seite 133

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Automatic transmission*: center console

To open: press on the cover.

Storage compartments in the cargo area Net* Small objects can be stowed in the net on the rear cargo area trim.

Storage compartment under the cargo floor cover

Raise the cargo floor cover using the strap.

Lashing eyes To secure the cargo, refer to page 141, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Seite 134

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

St or

ag e

co m

pa rtm

en ts

Seite 135

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful

in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Things to remember when driving Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine, 4500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe riod. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx.

300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be ob served if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Closing the trunk lid

Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, in the event of an accident or braking or evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: If the convertible top is closed, close all win

dows. Greatly increase the blower speed. Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. When driv ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot ex haust system and any highly flammable materi als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Seite 138

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Th in

gs to

re m

em be

r w he

n dr

ivi ng

Climate control windshield*

The marked area is not covered with heat re flective coating. Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile commu nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec tronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec trical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users.

Seite 139

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, resulting in a reduction in the brake system efficiency. Manual transmission: You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Automatic transmission*: You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down in the manual mode of the auto matic transmission, refer to page 72.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos sibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con densation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal.

Loading Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carrying

capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in creases the rate at which damage develops in side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard*: The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve hicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

Seite 140

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Th in

gs to

re m

em be

r w he

n dr

ivi ng

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo area separating wall.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Cover sharp edges and corners.

Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area

Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re

taining straps or with a cargo net* or draw straps.

Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps*.

Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as

described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu pants.

Saving fuel General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors.

Seite 141

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing the windows Open windows increase air resistance and therefore lead to greater fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start ing on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high en gine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the en gine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. The gear shift indicator* of your vehicle indi cates the most fuel efficient gear.

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac celerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear win dow defroster require a lot of energy and con sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop- and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your serv ice center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem.

Seite 142

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Th in

gs to

re m

em be

r w he

n dr

ivi ng

Seite 143

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Navigation This chapter contains various examples of how the navigation system can guide you reliably to

your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Navigation* Navigation system General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradic tion between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Destination input Manual destination entry

General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons, refer to page 24. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. If the existing entries should not be changed,

the entries for the state/province and town/ city can be skipped.

Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered.

Entering a state/province 1. Press the MENU button. 2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Move the controller to the right. 4. Select the town/city name from the list. If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code* 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city. 2. Select the symbol.

Seite 146

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

3. Select the numbers. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/

cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same

way as you would enter a town/city. If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. 3. Select the street.

Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house

numbers.

Street does not exist in the destination city/town The desired street does not exist in the specified city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" the displayed country.

All streets of the selected state/province are offered. The associated town/city is dis played after the street name.

6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. 9. Select the street.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 152.

Address book

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

Contacts with addresses are displayed if these have been checked as destinations. If the mobile phone* does not display the contacts with addresses, they must first be

Seite 147

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

checked as a destination, refer to page 217.

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search".

4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination, store the desti nation in the address book.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

3. Select an existing contact, if available. 4. "Business address" or "Home address" 5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First

name". 6. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book.

1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options".

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact"

4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the entry. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 216.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Seite 148

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

Last destinations

At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. The destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance"

Editing the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last

destinations"

Special destinations

Opening the search for special destinations To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or tourist attractions:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. Select the search function.

Online Search* 1. "Google Search" 2. Select a special destination. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Start guidance"

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City"

Select or enter the town/city. 3. "Category" 4. Select the category. 5. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple cat egory details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

6. "Keyword" 7. Enter the keyword.

A list of the special destinations is displayed. 8. Select a special destination.

Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary.

9. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 152.

Seite 149

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

"Start search": if a search term is not entered, the search is repeated with the previous search term.

Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "Town/City"

Select or enter the town/city. 3. "Category" 4. Select the category. 5. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple cat egory details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

6. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is displayed.

7. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary.

8. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 152.

Display of special destinations List of special destinations: special destinations are organized by distance and are displayed with a directional arrow to the special destination. on the split screen, special destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as symbols. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category.

Destination entry via BMW Assist* A connection is established to the Concierge service, refer to page 219.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Open "Options". 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest" 5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map

Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is indi cated on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with crosshairs. To change the scale: turn the controller. To shift the map: move the controller in

the required direction. To shift the map diagonally: move the

controller in the required direction and turn it.

Seite 150

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

Specifying the street If the system does not recognize a street, one of the following is displayed: The name of a street in the vicinity. The county. The coordinates of the destination.

Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed.

Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 152.

"Exit interactive map": return to the map view.

"View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"

"Display destination": the map section around the destination is displayed.

"Display current location": the map section around your current location is displayed.

"Find points of interest": the search for spe cial destinations is started.

Destination entry by voice*

General information Instructions for voice activation system, re

fer to page 25. When making a destination entry by voice,

you can change between voice operation and iDrive.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands

Saying the entries the town/city, street, and house number can

be entered as a single command*. Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in

tersections can be said as whole words* or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 80. Example: to enter a town/city in a US state as a whole word, the language of the system must be English.

Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ.

Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

The options available for entering data de pend on the navigation data and the country and language settings.

entering an address using a command*

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Enter address 3. Wait for a request from the system. 4. Say the address in the suggested order. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g., the town/city.

Entering a town/city separately The name of the town/city can be said as a word* or spelled out. With the destination entry menu displayed:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. City or Spell city. 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the

town/city.

Seite 151

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least the first three letters. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit ies may be suggested.

5. Select the town/city. To select a recommended town/

city: Yes To select a different town/city: New

entry Select an entry: Entry ... e.g., entry 2 To spell an entry: Spell city

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis.

1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ... e.g., En try 2.

2. Select the desired town/city.

Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city.

Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation system, house numbers up to number 2000 can be en tered.

1. House number 2. Say the house number.

Say each digit separately. 3. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system.

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations

New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary. 4. "Guidance" 5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the type of destination entry.

7. Enter the intermediate destination. 8. "Start guidance"

Entering intermediate destinations For a trip, a max. of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered.

1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination"

The intermediate destination is entered in the destination list and is highlighted.

5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located in the desired position in the list.

6. Press the controller.

Starting the trip 1. After all intermediate destinations are en

tered, highlight the first destination. If the second destination, for example, is highlighted when destination guidance is started, the first destination is skipped.

2. "Start guidance" This symbol marks the active leg of the

trip.

Seite 152

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

Store the trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If necessary, delete existing trips to be able to store new trips.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter the name. 4. "OK"

Select the stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Select a stored trip. 4. "Start guidance"

Reversing the direction of travel Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list.

1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Intermediate destination options 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all trip destinations" 4. Select an intermediate destination.

"Edit destination" "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an

intermediate destination to another po sition in the list.

"Delete dest. in the trip" "Go to next dest. in the trip"

Some options are not available for certain trips.

Delete the stored trip 1. "Stored trips" 2. Highlight the desired trip. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Open the last trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. "Last trip" 4. "Start guidance"

Destination guidance Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 146. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" The route is shown on the Control Display. The distance to the destination/intermedi

ate destination and the estimated time of ar rival are displayed in the map view.

The arrow view is shown in the instrument cluster, in the Head-up Display*, and on the Control Display where appropriate.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. "Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria. The route criteria can be changed when the

destination is entered and during destina tion guidance.

Seite 153

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when plan ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.

The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on personal ex perience.

The settings are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 159.

Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion:

"Fast route": time-optimized route, being a combination of the shortest pos sible route and the fastest roads.

"Efficient route": optimized combi nation of the fastest and shortest route.

"Short route": short distance, irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be.

"Alternative routes": if available, alter native routes are suggested during ac tive route guidance. The individual sug gestions are highlighted in color.

5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if necessary: "Avoid highways": highways are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided

wherever possible.

"Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided where possible.

Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on

the Control Display. List of route sections. Map view, refer to page 155. Arrow view in the Head-up Display*, refer to

page 121.

Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Large arrow: current direction of travel. Small arrow: indicates the next change in di

rection. Intersection view. Lane information. Traffic bulletins. Distance to the next change in direction. Street name at the next change in direction.

Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. Solid triangle: best lane. Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an

other lane change may be needed shortly.

Displaying list of route sections When the destination guidance is started, a list of route sections can be displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. Mark route section.

The route section is displayed on the split screen.

Seite 154

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for"

4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo meters within which you would like to return to the original route.

5. Press the controller.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated, and if nec essary gas stations along the route are dis played.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Recommended refuel"

A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station.

The position of the gas station is displayed on the split screen.

5. Select the gas station.

6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to

the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta tion is added to the route.

Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Voice instructions"

Repeating spoken instructions 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice.

Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set.

Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on/off can be stored on a programmable memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac cess.

Map view Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

Seite 155

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

At a glance

1 Function bar 2 Route section with traffic obstruction 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field

Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different col ors and styles depending on their classification. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con nections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indicate route sections with traffic obstructions, depend ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian gles indicates the direction of the obstruction. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction. Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the

planned route or direction. Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not

affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 157.

Planned route After destination guidance is started, the plan ned route is displayed on the map.

Status fields Show/hide: press the controller.

Upper status field: time, telephone, and en tertainment details.

Lower status field: symbol for active desti nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.

Function bar The following functions are available in the func tion bar:

Symbol Function

Start/end destination guidance.

Switch spoken instructions on/ off.

Change the route criteria.

Search for a special destination.

Display the traffic bulletins.

Interactive map.

Set the map view.

Change the scale.

To change to the function bar, move the con troller to the left.

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

To shift the map diagonally: move the con troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller.

Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played. The map shows the entire route be tween the current location and the destination.

Seite 156

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" Set the map view. "Day/night mode"

Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded.

"Satellite images" Depending on availability and resolution, satellite images* are displayed in a scale of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

"Perspective view in 3D" Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins, refer to page 157. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map view for split screen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly

until the split screen is selected. 4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. 5. Select the map view.

"Arrow display" "Map facing north" "Map direction of travel" "Map view with perspective" "Position"

"Exit ramp view": selected blind drive ways are displayed three dimensionally. Setting in some cases will affect the dis play in the Head-Up Display*.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" 6. To change the scale: select the split screen

and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins* At a glance Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta

tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service. Informa tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously. Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real- time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic Network) holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to re produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic in cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Net work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.

Seite 157

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to li censee as is, and where is. Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the li censed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the li censed material (including, without limita tion, that the licensed material will be error- free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, im plied or statutory, including, without limita tion, the implied warranties of merchanta bility, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade. D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or inci dental damages (including, without limita tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limita tions apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict li ability). Some states do not allow the exclu sion or limitation of incidental or consequen tial damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.

The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols.

The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.

The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulletins that affect the calculated route.

Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Open the traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"

First the traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle.

4. Select a traffic bulletin. "More information": display additional

information. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin

if required.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indication on the control display is switched to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. Symbols and special destinations are not displayed.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed

Seite 158

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Red: congestion. Orange: stop-and-go traffic. Yellow: heavy traffic. Green: clear roads. Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc

tion site. The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service.

Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired categories.

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis played on the map. Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route

are always shown. For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no

tify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid den.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins

Semi-dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.

The destination guidance system takes the available traffic information into account. A mes sage is displayed depending on the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. A detour is suggested in the event of a traffic obstruction. In addition, distance and time dif ferences between the original route and the de tour are displayed. To accept the detour:

"Detour" In the event of special hazards, e.g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes sages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic ob

structions along the original route. Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on

the map. Depending on road type and the kind and

extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction.

Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting.

To activate dynamic destination guidance:

1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"

Seite 159

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Navigation data Information on the navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Navigation system version": information on

the data version is displayed.

Updating the navigation data

General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your service center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be up dated. Depending on the data volume, a data up

date may take several hours. Update during the trip to preserve battery. During the update, only the basic functions

of the navigation system are available. The status of the update can be viewed. The system restarts after the update. The data carrier with the navigation data can

be removed after the update is complete.

Perform an update 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis

play. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga

tion DVD and change the DVD if needed. After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc tions on the Control Display.

Viewing the status

1. Press the button. 2. "Navigation update"

What to do if... The current transmission position cannot be

displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guidance.

The destination is not used for route guid ance? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

Letters for destination input cannot be se lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original.

Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indi cation on the control display is switched to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to cal culate a new route suggestion.

Seite 160

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Na vig

at io

n

Seite 161

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Entertainment The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when

receiving radio and television stations and playing CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Tone General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer* Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.

Adjusting the equalizer 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" 4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Multi-channel playback, surround* Choose between stereo and multi-channel play back, surround.

Setting multi-channel playback, surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Surround"

Seite 164

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

To ne

When surround is activated, multi-channel play back is simulated when a stereo audio track is played.

Volume "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume

control. "PDC": volume of the PDC signal* com

pared to the entertainment sound output. "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the

safety belt reminder, compared to the en tertainment sound output.

"Microphone": volume of the microphone* during a phone call.

"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers* during a phone call.

The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"

Opening the tone settings in the Options menu* 1. "CD/Multimedia" or "Radio" 2. If necessary, select additional entries, for ex

ample, "FM" or "CD/DVD". 3. Open "Options". 4. "Tone" 5. Set the desired tone.

Seite 165

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Radio Controls

1 Change entertainment sources 2 Change station/track 3 Programmable memory buttons 4 Volume, on/off 5 Change wave band

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

AM/FM station Selecting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

All saved stations are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Changing the station via the button Press the button.

Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

Seite 166

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ra di

o

1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

RDS* RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band. When playing a station with multiple frequencies, the system automatically switches to the frequency with the best reception, if needed.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

HD Radio reception* Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals. License conditions

HD Radio technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq uity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. Due to time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the ar tist.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station also

broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. Station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds. If reception is interrupted for an extended period, it switches back to the main station.

Seite 167

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Weather Band* General information The availability of the Weather Band and the number of available channels can vary depend ing on the region.

Switching on the Weather Band 1. "Radio" 2. "Weather band" 3. Select the desired channel.

Additional information Weather Band is a service of the National Oce anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). Additional information on the Internet: www.nws.noaa.gov.

Satellite radio* General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages. The packages must be enabled by tele phone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Open the My Favorites category/ open a favorite.

Manage the favorites.

Traffic Jump

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory.

5. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the chan nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"

Seite 168

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ra di

o

3. Open "Options". 4. "Manage subscription"

5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via iDrive 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate

gory. 4. Select the desired channel.

Via the buttons on the center console Press the button. The next channel is selected.

Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the controller until the desired channel

is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the

highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Meaning

Channel name

Artist

Track

Seite 169

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Selecting a category 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a de lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"

The red arrow shows the current playback position.

The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar. For live transmissions: "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Symbol Function

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac tivated

Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. Activation of the voice activation system. Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay. To activate:

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift" To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team.

Storing the artist, track, or game It is only possible to store favorites that are cur rently being broadcast. The channel information must be available.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Select the artist, track, or game.

Seite 170

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ra di

o

Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the fol lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec onds: "Favorite alert!".

"Favorites" Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played. If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor

ites. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:" Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available. A new panel opens. Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broad cast.

Seite 171

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes Reception may not be available in some sit

uations, such as under certain environmen tal or topographic conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio" 2. "Presets"

3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Seite 172

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ra di

o

CD/multimedia Controls

1 Change the entertainment source 2 CD/DVD* drive 3 Eject CD/DVD 4 Change station/track 5 Programmable memory buttons 6 Volume, on/off

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

CD/DVD* Playback

Filling the CD/DVD* player Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files.

Starting playback A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or DVD changer*.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD* player

... DVD changer*

Playable formats DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-

RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video*.

CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD*, SVCD*.

Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*, M4A*.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired track is played.

Seite 173

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Selecting a track via iDrive

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor rectly.

1. Select the directory if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information on the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Interpret. Album track. Number of tracks on the CD/DVD*. File name of track.

Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD*. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files: All tracks in the selected directory are played in random order. Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Seite 174

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

Automatic repeat* The selected CDs or DVDs are repeated auto matically.

Video playback*

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on the DVD.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af rica

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a DVD with video content. 4. "DVD menu"

VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a CD with video content. 4. "Select track" 5. Select the desired track.

Video menu To open the video menu: turn the controller dur ing playback. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

Symbol Function

Open the DVD menu.

Start playback.

Pause

Stop

Next chapter

Previous chapter

Fast forward

Reverse

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

video menu.

Seite 175

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

2. "DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display de pends on the contents of the DVD.

3. To select menu items: move the controller and press it.

To change to the video menu: turn the controller and press it.

DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on the DVD.

Selecting the language* The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

Selecting the subtitles* The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".

3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not

display subtitles".

Setting the brightness, contrast and color 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display settings" 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".

Seite 176

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

3. "Additional options" 4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting a track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track. VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track" 2. Select the desired track.

Selecting the camera angle* The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

DVD changer*

In the glove compartment

Pull the handle.

Controls and displays

1 Empty DVD compartments 2 LED on DVD slot 3 Buttons for DVD compartments 4 DVD slot 5 Fill DVD compartments

Filling the DVD compartments individually

1. Press the button. The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.

2. Select another compartment if necessary. 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash. 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.

The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and placed into the selected compartment.

Seite 177

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.

Filling all empty DVD compartments

1. Hold the button down. The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.

2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into the center of the slot. The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically and placed into the vacant compartments.

Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.

After they are inserted, it may take several mi nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.

Removing a single CD/DVD

1. Press the button. 2. Select the DVD compartment.

The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 3. Remove the CD/DVD.

Removing all CDs/DVDs

1. Hold the button down. 2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.

Malfunctions If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap idly, a malfunction has occurred.

To eliminate the malfunction:

1. Press one of the buttons:

The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. The DVD changer is functional again after the LEDs stop flashing rapidly.

Audio playback* The audio track of a DVD can be played back even if video playback is not possible in the ve hicle. Only the main film without the previews or extras can be played back.

Starting playback A DVD is located in the DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD.

Selecting a chapter using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired chapter is played.

Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Select the desired chapter.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Selecting the language* The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

Seite 178

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Audio/language" 6. Select the desired language.

Notes

CD/DVD player and changer Do not remove the cover BMW CD/DVD players and changers are

officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage may occur.

CDs and DVDs Use of CDs/DVDs Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs

with labels applied, as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrepar able damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject.

Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes:

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with

home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures

over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

Seite 179

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

DTS Digital Surround Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Music collection* Storing music

General information Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there. Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com

pressed audio format. If available, informa tion on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A*, and AAC* formats are stored. Individual tracks and directories can be deleted later, Delet ing a track and directory, refer to page 183. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back.

Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data; other

wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disk.

Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Gracenote.

Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec ognition technology and related content deliv ery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote.

This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend ing. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Storing from a CD/DVD 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/DVD" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in se quence. Observe the following during the storage proc ess: Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without inter rupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can be called up.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"

Seite 180

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 4. "Continue storing" Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this informa tion is available in the vehicle database or on the CD. To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment. Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi

ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.

Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment, refer to page 132.

2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Music data import/export" 6. "Import music (USB)"

Playing music

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album, refer to page 182.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search"

Seite 181

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired entry: Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,

and input the desired entry. Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

Restarting the music search "New search"

Music search using spoken instructions* Instructions for the voice activation system, re fer to page 25.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Music search 3. Open the desired category, e.g., Select

artist. 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select other categories if you wish. To select a track directly: Title .... Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in a single command.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search, or the album that was selected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50 The 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed.

Seite 182

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

The first track is played automatically, if pos sible.

4. Change directories if needed to select tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.

Random playback All tracks of the selection are played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album* The name of the album, if available, is automat ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is not available, it can be changed later if desired.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Free memory"

Seite 183

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur ing a long trip.

1. Starting the engine. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter

face in the glove compartment. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device, the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options".

4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"

External devices At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface*

Mobile phone audio interface*

Bluetooth audio*

AUX-IN port

At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.

Seite 184

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

Connect the headphones or line-out connector of the device to the jack plug.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary "External devices". 4. "AUX front"

Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs mark edly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary "External devices". 3. "AUX front" 4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface*/mobile phone audio interface*

At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connectors for external devices Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play

ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

Connection via snap-in adapter when equip ped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.

Due to the large number of different audio devi ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone is opera ble on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio de vices/mobile phones.

Audio files Standard audio files can be played back: MP3. WMA. WAV (PCM). AAC*, M4A*. Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface

The USB audio interface is in the center armrest. Connect using a flexible adapter cable.

Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB interface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.

Seite 185

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface

The USB audio interface is in the center armrest. Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB audio interface and the USB device against physical damage.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmit ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist ing music tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

The playback starts with the first track. On the split screen*, the CD cover for the music track might be displayed after a few seconds.

Track search Selection is possible via: Playback lists. Information: type of music, artist, and, if

available, composer, album, track. In addition, for USB devices: file directory

and, if available, composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Search" 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or

"Artist". All entries are displayed in a list. Open "A-Z search" and input the de

sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that sequence are displayed.

Seite 186

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis played.

7. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists Calling up playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"

Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Video playback*

At a glance Video playback via snap-in adapter possible. They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Video" 5. Select the directory if necessary.

To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

6. Select the desired video file to begin play back.

Video menu

Symbol Function

Next video file

Previous video file Double-click on an icon to play back previous video file.

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions, such as very high tem peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case.

Seite 187

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Information on connection The connected audio device is supplied with

a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not additionally con nect the device to a socket in the vehicle; otherwise, playback may be compromised.

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB audio interface to re

charge external devices.

Bluetooth audio*

At a glance Music files on external devices such as audio

devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 197.

The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers.

The volume of the sound output is depend ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.

Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements The device is suitable. Information under

www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. The device is ready for operation. The ignition is switched on. Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to

page 197, and on the device. Bluetooth presettings must be made on the

device, such as for a connection without confirmation or visibility; refer to the device operating instructions.

A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass key. It is only required once for pairing.

Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer to the device operating instructions: for in stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

Seite 188

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, for instance "Audio".

9. "OK"

If pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an audio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer to page 190.

Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue tooth.

Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Configure phone" 7. "Audio" 8. "OK"

Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices.

White symbol : the device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information The display of music track information de

pends on the device. Operation can takes place on the device or

iDrive. Playback is interrupted when data is ex

changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect the device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices"

Seite 189

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec essary.

Playback menu* Depending on the particular device, some of the functions may not be available.

Symbol Function

Next track Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous music track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone"

6. "Audio" 7. "OK"

Unpairing a device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable devices can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196. The device is not supported by the vehicle. Perform a software update*, refer to

page 191, if needed. The device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device

and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or vehicle? Delete connections with other devices if necessary.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap- in adapter or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one device can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.

The device no longer reacts? Switch the de vice off and on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure. Music cannot be played back. Start the program for playing back music

data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary.

Switch the radio off and on again. Music files can only be played back softly.

Seite 190

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

Adjust the volume settings on the device. Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device. Switch off the button tones and other signal

tones on the device. Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. Switch the radio off and on again. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone*. Disconnect one of the two connections; for

example, disconnect the audio connection, refer to page 190, and restart playback.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Software Update* The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version. With a software update, the vehicle can support new cell phones* or new external devices*. The updating of the software is done via: USB*.

Updates and related current information is available at www.bmw.com/update.

TeleService*. Existing software can be updated directly via the vehicle.

Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Show current version" SelectDesired version* to displayAdditional in formation*.

Updating software via USB* The software may only be updated when the ve hicle is stationary.

1. Store the file for the software-update in the main director of a USB flash drive.

2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in terface of the USB audio interface in the center armrest. An update via the USB in terface in the glove compartment is not pos sible.

3. "Settings" 4. "Software update" 5. "Update software"

6. If necessary. "USB". 7. "Start update" 8. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.

Updating software via TeleService* The software may only be updated when the ve hicle is stationary.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "Settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Update software" 5. If necessary "TeleService". 6. If necessary, "Start update". 7. "Start update" 8. "OK" All listed software updates are installed. To interrupt updating: "Cancel".

Restoring the previous version If it should become necessary, the software ver sion prior to the last software update can be re stored.

Seite 191

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

The previous version may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.

Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restoredBMW Assist*, Of fice functions* and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.

Seite 192

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

CD /m

ul tim

ed ia

Seite 193

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Communication All of the options available to you for mobile

communication with family, friends, business partners, and service providers are described in

this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Telephone* At a glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are inside the ve hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel, and via voice activation*. Depending on their functionality, external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions are described in the following. Operating the audio functions, refer to page 188. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve hicle occupants and other road users.

Snap-in adapter* The snap-in adapter is used to: Hold the mobile phone. Recharge the battery. Connect the mobile phone to an outside an

tenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack

age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue tooth.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mo bile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction. A software update can be performed if neces sary.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available: Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele

phone. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. Use of an audio device as an audio source,

refer to page 188.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable.

Seite 196

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te le

ph on

e

The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone. Bluetooth presettings may need to be made

on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. A number with at least four and a maximum

of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

General information Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit able mobile phones, refer to page 196, that sup port these functions.

Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to accept incoming calls, refer to page 200. While a call is active on the additional telephone, incoming calls are displayed on the Control Display.

Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.

Activating/deactivating the additional functions 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Open "Options". 4. Select the desired additional function.

"Additional telephone" "Office" "Bluetooth audio"

Pairing and connecting a device Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or con nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display. Prompt via iDrive or the mobile phone to en ter the same Bluetooth passkey.

6. Enter the passkey and confirm.

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK" If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Seite 197

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive.

Symbol Function

Telephone.

Additional telephone.

Audio source.

Four devices can be paired with the vehicle at once. Three devices can be connected with the vehicle at once. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer to page 198.

Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card* or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detection, depending on the mobile phone.

Four devices can be paired. Specific settings may be necessary in some

mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a specific device If more than one device is detected by the vehi cle, the device at the top of the list is connected. A different device can be connected by select ing it.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Select the device that is to be connected. The functions that were assigned to the device before unpairing are assigned to the device

when it is reconnected. If the device is already connected, these functions are deactivated.

Configuring the devices Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected devices.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the device to be configured. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. At least one function must be selected.

"Telephone" "Additional telephone" "Audio"

7. "OK" If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a de vice that is already connected and the device will be unpaired.

Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional tel ephone can be swapped automatically.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Unpairing a device 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196. The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected.

Seite 198

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te le

ph on

e

Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con nections with other devices if necessary.

Is the audio connection activated? Deacti vate the audio connection.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap- in adapter* or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one device can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.

The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.

The telephone functions are not available. Is the mobile phone paired as an additional

telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the function.

Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

No or not all phone book entries are displayed, or they are incomplete. Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card* are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

The number of phone book entries being stored is too high.

Is the data volume of the contact too large, e.g., due to stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.

Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.

The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter* or place it in the area of the center console.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Controls Adjusting the volume Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use. The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the vol ume of the called party. Depending on the mo bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad justed. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone. The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or

"Loudspeak." 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Seite 199

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is displayed. If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to the additional telephone is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.

Accepting a call

Via iDrive "Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster* "Accept"

Rejecting a call

Via iDrive "Reject"

Via the instrument cluster* "Reject"

Ending a call

Via iDrive

"End call"

Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster* "End call"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple participants

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions

Seite 200

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te le

ph on

e

must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly. If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded where appropri ate.

"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The call on hold is resumed.

Switching between two calls, hold call The active call is displayed in color. The call on hold is displayed in gray.

"Swap calls" The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls. 2. "Conference call" When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute" A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated: When a new connection is established. When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling devi ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial

number". 3. "Keypad dialing" 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book"

Seite 201

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Calling a contact

Symbol Meaning

Contact with one stored phone num ber.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone with out reception or network, or Service Request* is active.

For contacts with one stored phone number: se lect the required contact. The connection is be ing established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is being estab lished.

Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed. The sorting order of the phone numbers depends on the particular mo bile phone.

Dialing the number via the instrument cluster This is possible when there is no active call.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established.

Dialing a number via iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial" 3. Select the desired entry and the phone num

ber if necessary. The connection is established.

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select "New phone number" or contact. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".

Received calls

Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played.

1. "Telephone"

Seite 202

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te le

ph on

e

2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select "New phone number" or contact. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".

Hands-free system

General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system au tomatically switches to the hands-free system. If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis

play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Voice operation* Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys tem: operation, refer to page 25. Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation system: depending on the equipment, the mo bile phone can be voice operated as described below. The list of short commands in the operating manual does not apply to this type of voice op eration.

The concept The mobile phone can be operated without

taking your hands from the steering wheel. In many cases, the entries are accompanied

by announcements or questions. ... Verbal instructions for voice operation.

Using voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Seite 203

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloud Press the button. Help. Possible commands are announced. The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The digits can be spoken separately or combined in a sequence to accelerate the entry.

Using alternative commands The system often recognizes a number of dif ferent commands to run a function; for instance: Dial name or Name

Example: dialing a phone number

1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Dial number The system says: Please say the number

3. E.g., 123 456 790 The system says: 123 456 790. Continue?

4. Dial The system says: Dialing number

Calling

Dialing a phone number 1. Dial number 2. Say the phone number. 3. Dial

Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits. Correct number The command can be repeated as often as nec essary.

Deleting a phone number Delete All digits entered up to that point are deleted.

Redialing Redial

Voice phone book* Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice activa tion and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Saving an entry 1. Save name 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking

duration of approx. 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being prompted

to do so by the system. 4. Save

Deleting an entry 1. Delete name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with Yes.

Deleting all entries 1. Delete phonebook

The dialog for deleting the phone book is opened.

2. Confirm the query with Yes. 3. Confirm the query again with Yes.

Reading and selecting entries 1. Read phonebook

The dialog for reading the phone book is opened.

2. Say Dial number when the desired entry is read.

Selecting an entry 1. Dial name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with Yes.

Seite 204

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te le

ph on

e

Adjusting the volume Turn the knob during an announcement. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Notes Do not use the voice operation to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un necessarily delay the establishment of a tele phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 248, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the system. The language for the mobile phone voice operation is preset and cannot be changed in the Control Display.

Keep the doors, windows, and convertible top closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Snap-in adapter* Installation position In the center armrest.

Inserting the snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en gages.

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con nector of the mobile phone.

2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac ing up in the direction of the electrical con nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar row 2 until it engages.

Seite 205

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Seite 206

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te le

ph on

e

Office* At a glance General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand ards. Information about which mobile phones support the Office functions can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number of compatible mobile phones is available for Of fice. Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. The mobile phone has read-access only.

Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this.

Requirements A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone.

The time, time zone, and date, refer to page 79, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone to correctly display appointments, for example.

Office is activated, refer to page 197.

Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated separately.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",

"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Update data"

Cell phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle.

Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Select the desired entry to display details.

Contacts At a glance Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. Addresses can be adopted as destina tions for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information 1. "Office"

Seite 207

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers* 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. "Store contact in vehicle"

When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination* 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.

When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the vehi cle. In this case: Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact

General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter net address.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options".

Seite 208

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Of fic

e

4. "New contact"

5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"

6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. 8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation

system: Enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehi cle can be entered. This ensures that desti nation guidance is possible for all ad dresses. If necessary, "Accept address".

9. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses.

Symbol Meaning

Home phone number.

Business phone number.

Mobile phone number.

Other phone number.

Home address.

Business address.

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the names* Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting order.

Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Show images" Display of all contact pictures is activated or de activated.

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 33. The contacts stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those from the mobile phone.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone* cannot be deleted.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. Open "Options".

Seite 209

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

5. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts". 6. If necessary. "Yes"

Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e- mails may not be supported by the service pro vider, or the function may need to be enabled separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, transmission may take several minutes. Mes sages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi tional telephone are not transmitted. Display of different messages: Text messages. My Info* messages from the BMW Assist

Portal. Messages from the BMW Assist Concierge

service*. Messages from BMW Info*. E-mails from the mobile phone.

Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A symbol identifies the type of message.

Symbol Message type

Text messages.

My Info

Message from the Concierge serv ice.

Message from BMW Info.

E-mail from mobile phone.

Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered, when more than one type of message exists.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select the type of message. "All"

All messages are displayed. "E-mail"

Only e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed.

"Service message" Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service, My Info and BMW Info are displayed.

"Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.

Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service, My Info, and BMW Info can be deleted. Delete a message:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete message" Delete all messages:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages"

Seite 210

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Of fic

e

3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service

messages"

Text messages

Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.

Saving the sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

Reading the text message out loud* Read the text messages out loud, refer to page 214.

My Info

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.

1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":

If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.

"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.

Message from the Concierge service

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.

1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":

If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.

"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.

Storing an address 1. Select the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Displaying additional information 1. Select the desired message. 2. "Further information"

BMW Info

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.

Seite 211

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":

If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.

"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.

E-mail*

Displaying e-mails 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired e-mail.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans mitted by the mobile phone, this information is displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 214.

Deactivating the full display When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of the email from the cell phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading the e-mail out loud* Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 214.

Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"

The appointments on the current day are displayed.

Selecting the calendar day 1. Select the date.

2. Select the desired day or date. "Next day" "Date:" "Previous day" "Today"

Display the appointment 1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces

sary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 214.

Seite 212

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Of fic

e

Reading the appointment out loud* Read the appointment out loud, refer to page 214.

Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days.

1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"

Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Select the sorting criterion: "Priority (!)"* "Subject" "Due date"

Displaying the task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Scroll in the task if necessary:

Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 214.

Reading the task out loud* Read the task out loud, refer to page 214.

Notes Displaying notes 1. "Office" 2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note.

2. Scroll in the note if necessary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 214.

Reading the note out loud* Read the note out loud, refer to page 214.

Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or after a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed.

Seite 213

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Using contact data At a glance Contact data from calendar entries, appoint ments, tasks, emails and notes can be stored or selected*.

Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1. "Use contact data" 2. Display the contact or select the phone

number: Select the contact to display contact de

tails. Select the phone number to establish a

connection directly.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad

dress. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new

contact"

Reading out loud* Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol. The following options are available during read ing: "Pause"

Interrupt reading. Select again to restart reading.

"Back to beginning" Start reading message again from the be ginning.

Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph.

Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph.

To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis played. The mobile phone is not capable of the

missing function or is not connected cor rectly.

The Office function is deactivated. The mobile phone is connected as an addi

tional phone. Appointments are older than 20 days or are

more than 50 days in the future. The tasks have been marked as completed

or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future.

Depending on the number of stored ap pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle.

Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile phone are displayed at the right time? The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set

on the Control Display and mobile phone. The e-mail attachment is not displayed. E-mails are transmitted without an attach

ment. Entries are not displayed in full length. Text were already transmitted from the mo

bile phone in a shortened form. Synchronization between the mobile phone

and vehicle may take several minutes. The contact pictures are not being displayed? A max. of 200 contact pictures can be stored

in the vehicle. The E-mail is displayed with a delay?

Seite 214

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Of fic

e

Check the e-mail settings on the telephone and adjust if necessary.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Seite 215

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Contacts* General information Contacts can be created and edited and the ad dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav igation.

New contact 1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"

3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Enter the text, refer to page 24. 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation

system: Enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehi cle can be entered. This ensures that desti nation guidance is possible for all ad dresses.

7. If necessary, "Store". 8. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts" 2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination*.

Seite 216

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Co nt

ac ts

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. Move the controller to the left. 5. "Yes"

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination* 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name"

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 33.

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

Seite 217

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

BMW ConnectedDrive BMW Assist* General information BMW Assist provides you with certain services, e.g., transmission of the position data of your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if an Emergency Request* has been initiated. Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi vidually agreed upon contract. After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without your having to visit a service center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.

Requirements The installed BMW Assist system is logged

in to a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmit ting the services.

To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.

The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your service center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.

BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered Emergency Request: when you press the

SOS button, a connection to the BMW As sist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

Automatic Collision Notification: under cer tain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW As

sist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. If possible, the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the process.

Customer Relations: connection with Cus tomer Relations for information on all as pects of your vehicle.

TeleService: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmit ted to your service center, either automati cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.

Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex ample, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.

Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter mine its position.

In addition to these services, the optional Convenience Plan offers Concierge service and information for route planning, traffic, and weather. A limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center with Critical Calling if, for example, the mobile phone is not available or dis charged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.

BMW TeleService* General information TeleService supports communication with your service center. Data on the vehicle's service requirements

can be sent directly to the service center. In this way, the service center can plan its work

Seite 218

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

BM W

C on

ne ct

ed Dr

ive

in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve hicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance.

The service varies by country. Connection costs may ensue. Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements BMW Assist is activated. Wireless reception is available. The engine is running.

Use of BMW TeleService* The TeleServices are typically activated in the vehicle. Even TeleService Customer Service is not ac tive, a voice contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible. To continue using or to deactivate the services, please contact your service partner or the BMW customer hotline.

Concierge service* General information The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Convenience Plan.

Starting the Concierge service 1. "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service" A voice connection is established with the BMW Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.

Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. Roadside Assistance* can also be contacted via a Check Control message, refer to page 82.

Starting Roadside Assistance

Vehicles not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"

The Roadside Assistance number is dis played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con nection is established to Roadside Assis tance.

Seite 219

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance" 3. "Start service"

TeleService Diagnosis* TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically. After the data are transmitted, the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab lished.

TeleService Help* TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire less transmission. TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and the termination of the voice connection.

Starting TeleService Help 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. The engine is running. 4. "TeleService Help" After completion of TeleService Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assis tance.

BMW Online* At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW On line. License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun tries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan. The date setting, refer to page 80, on the

Control Display is current. The vehicle is located within wireless net

work coverage.

Starting BMW Online 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online"

3. If necessary, "OK". The BMW Online home page is displayed.

Operating BMW Online To start a search: Turn the controller to highlight an element. Press the controller to display an element.

Seite 220

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

BM W

C on

ne ct

ed Dr

ive

Opening the start page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Reload"

Cancel 1. Open "Options". 2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicles not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" The Customer Relations phone number is dis played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con nection is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service"

Service Request* At a glance Sends information to your service partner to re quest the arrangement of a service appoint ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request. If possible, your service partner will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Request" 3. "Start service"

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 82.

Seite 221

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Automatic Service Request* The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your service partner prior to the service deadline. If possible, the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged. To check when your service partner was noti fied:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

Services status* General information Check services status.

Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status"

3. "Available services"

Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService* and BMW As sist*. "Update BMW Assist"

Data transfer* During the updating of BMW services, display the status of the data transfer.

1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Data transfer"

Apps* At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable cell phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Con trol Display. They are operated via iDrive.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The cell phone operating system supports

the software applications of Apps. Software applications are installed on the

cell phone and ready to use. Corresponding mobile wireless contract.

Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps.

Seite 222

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

BM W

C on

ne ct

ed Dr

ive

Use only BMW approved software applica tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc tions.

Information about suitable cell phones, available software applications and their installation can be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at the service center.

Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in danger because of the distraction from driving. For reasons of safety, some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is station ary.

Operate Apps 1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in

adapter or via the USB audio interface. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application.

Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed.

1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps"

PlugIn* Selected functions of the cell phone are dis played on the Control Display. They can be op erated via iDrive.

1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. "PlugIn" 4. "Activate PlugIn" 5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the

controller and select, for example, a desired category or track.

Press button to switch within the cell phone functions to a higher level or back.

Press button twice to switch back to the main menu.

Notes The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on

the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the cell phone.

The data transmission of the software ap plications from the cell phone to the vehicle can last some time. Some software applica tions depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the cell phone.

Some cell phones cannot simultaneously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-free sys tem. If necessary, restart the software application on the cell phone after a phone conversa tion.

TeleService Report* Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the ongoing development of BMW products from your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec essary. TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical requirements and have a valid Assist contract; this feature is free of charge. Neither personal data nor position data is trans mitted. Indicate when the last Teleservice Report was transmitted:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Teleservice Info"

Seite 223

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Mobility To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this

chapter supplies you with important information on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and

tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside Assistance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Refueling Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex ample. 1. Open the cover on the right side trim.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas

station.

Seite 226

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re fu

el in

g

Fuel tank capacity Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters.

Refuel promptly Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;

otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.

Seite 227

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Fuel Fuel quality

Refuel with unleaded fuel only Do not use leaded fuel as this would per

manently damage the catalytic converter.

Do not refuel with ethanol Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply sys tem.

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI 89 BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.

Gasoline with lower AKI The minimum AKI Rating is 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini

mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine damage may occur.

Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant differ ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

Minimum fuel grade The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

driveability, starting and stalling problems es pecially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high al titude. Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in unscheduled maintenance.

Seite 228

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Fu el

Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort.

Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein itialize the Flat Tire Monitor. After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 230, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Vehicle load.

Maximum allowable driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 230, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.

Seite 229

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

650i

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL

2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38

F: 245/45 R 18 96 Y R: 275/40 R 18 99 Y

2.3 / 33 -

- 2.4 / 35

F: 245/40 R 19 94 Y R: 275/35 R 19 96 Y

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

F: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL R: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.9 /42

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex

cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

650i Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL

2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41

245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S

2,5 / 363 3.0 / 44

F: 245/45 R 18 96 Y R: 275/40 R 18 99 Y

2.3 / 33 -

- 2.4 / 35

F: 245/40 R 19 94 Y R: 275/35 R 19 96 Y

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

F: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL R: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.9 /42

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 96 Y 2,5 / 363 3.0 / 44

245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

F: 245/45 R 18 96 Y R: 275/40 R 18 99 Y

2,5 / 363 -

- 2.7 / 39

Seite 230

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

W he

el s a

nd ti

re s

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

F: 245/40 R 19 94 Y R: 275/35 R 19 96 Y

2.6 / 38 -

- 3.0 / 44

F: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL R: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL

2.8 / 41 -

- 3,3 / 48

Tire identification marks Tire size 255/50 R 19 103 Y 255: nominal width in mm 50: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 19: rim diameter in inches 103: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 3510: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age DOT 3510: the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2010.

Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli mate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro planing, or peak traction characteristics.

Seite 231

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and pos sible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 234, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong tendency

to pull to the left or right. In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re

Seite 232

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

W he

el s a

nd ti

re s

placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob tained from your service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe riod. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires.

Seite 233

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe cialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the

winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci dents can occur.

Run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires* Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire., refer to page 93

Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recommended. Consult your service center for more informa tion.

Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 225/55 R 17. 245/45 R 18. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Seite 234

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

W he

el s a

nd ti

re s

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Snow chain detection*

The concept When using snow chains, you should set whether you are driving with or without snow chains via the iDrive. The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display. When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti vated automatically. At speeds above the maximum allowable speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again automatically.

Activating the status 1. "Settings" 2. "Tire chains" 3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detection If functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not

activated . After you drive a short distance, a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically. Confirm the automatic activation.

Snow chains are not mounted. The setting is activated . At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check Control message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually.

If not functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not

activated . A Check Control message is not displayed. The automatic detection system is malfunc tioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti vated automatically. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use.

Seite 235

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Engine compartment Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number* 2 Jump starting, negative terminal 3 Washer fluid reservoir

4 Jump starting, positive terminal 5 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir

Hood Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Never reach into the engine compartment Never reach into the intermediate spaces

or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot parts.

1. Pull the lever.

Seite 236

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

En gi

ne co

m pa

rtm en

t

2. Press the release handle and open the hood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protruding

parts when the hood is open.

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over imme diately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 237

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Engine oil General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, check the engine oil level after every refueling using the electronic engine oil level check.

Checking the oil level The concept The oil level is monitored electronically and dis played on the Control Display.

Requirements The engine must be running and warm after

the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 miles/10 km.

The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway.

Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages "Engine oil level OK" "Measurement not possible at this time." "Measuring engine oil level..."

Duration with the engine running: ap prox. 3 minutes.

Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes. "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1

quart!" Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked." Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi

ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en gine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Note the newly calculated remaining mile age until the next oil service. Have the sys tem checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil Filler neck

When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Recommended oil types, refer to page 239. Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Seite 238

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

En gi

ne o

il

Oil types Note

No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine damage.

Approved oil types Your service center can advise you on which en gine oils have been approved by the manufac turer of your vehicle. The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Only use approved BMW High Performance oil. Approved oils belong to the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow ing specification may be used. API SM quality standards or higher.

Coolant General information

Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en

gine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suit able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives.

Coolant level

Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess pres sure to dissipate, and then open it.

3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi

nated as soon as possible.

Seite 239

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Disposal Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 240

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

En gi

ne o

il

Maintenance BMW Maintenance System The maintenance system directs you to re quired maintenance measures and thereby sup ports you in maintaining road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 81, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is con tinuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your ve hicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti vated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en tries are proof of regular maintenance.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos sible.

The warning lamp flashes under cer tain circumstances:

Seite 241

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control compo nents, in particular the catalytic con verter.

Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel

vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time.

Data memory Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op eration, faults and user settings. These data are stored in the remote control and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the ve hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way provide valuable information for service proc esses and repair or for optimizing and develop ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you signed a service contract for Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to facilitate the desired serv ices.

Seite 242

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

M ai

nt en

an ce

Replacing components Tool kit

The tool kit is stored under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area.

Wiper blade replacement Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the wind shield.

Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to

page 71, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up the wipers.

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po sition.

4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

Lamp and bulb replacement General information Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to your service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your service center.

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you

should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Seite 243

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display el ements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare

into the unfiltered light for several hours; other wise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the light is switched on, the condensation evapo rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed. If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by your service center.

Front lamps, bulb replacement

Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps* and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a service center.

Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car ried out improperly.

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.

LEDs or light modules The following lamps are equipped with LED technology or are designed as light modules: Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps Turn signal lamps Front fog lamps* Daytime running lights* Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 243.

Corner-illuminating lamps* Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 243. The illustration shows the left side of the engine compartment. 55-watt bulb, H3

Seite 244

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re pl

ac in

g co

m po

ne nt

s

1. Unscrew the cap and remove it.

2. Detach the wire bracket.

3. Disconnect the cable at the plug-in connec tion and remove the bulb.

4. Insert the new bulb. Ensure that the bulb has the correct orientation. Because of its shape, the bulb can only be inserted in one direction.

5. Secure the bulb with the wire bracket. 6. Connect the bulb. 7. Mount the cap.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal 2 Backup lamp

3 Inside brake lamp* 4 Tail lamp 5 Outside brake lamp 6 Rear reflector*

Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and license plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 243. These lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Lamps in the trunk lid

Access to the lamps

Remove the five screws using the screwdriver from the tool kit and fold away the cover.

Inside brake lamp* Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 243. 24-watt bulb, HP24W

1. Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.

2. Pull off the connector.

Seite 245

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

3. Replace the bulb. 4. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the

trunk lid in reverse order.

Backup lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 243. 16-watt bulb, W16W

1. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.

2. Pull out the bulb and replace it. 3. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the

trunk lid in reverse order.

Changing wheels Notes The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire. When using run-flat tires* or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown.

Lug bolt lock*

The lug bolt lock is in the tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the tool kit.

Lug bolt, arrow 1. Adapter, arrow 2.

Removing 1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on.

Seite 246

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re pl

ac in

g co

m po

ne nt

s

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only. Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.

Charging the battery In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the terminals, refer to page 250, in the engine com partment with the engine off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again. Time: update. Date: update. Radio station: save again. Navigation system: wait for the operability of

the navigation.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses Notes

Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle to the side, arrow 1, and open the lid, arrow 2.

In the cargo area

Open the cover on the right side trim.

Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

Seite 247

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Breakdown assistance Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Emergency Request* Requirements Equipment version with full preparation

package mobile phone. An Emergency Request can be made, even if no mobile phones are paired with the ve hicle.

BMW Assist is activated. The radio ready state is switched on. The BMW Assist system is logged in to a

wireless communications network sup ported by BMW Assist.

The Assist system is functional. Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Re

quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Service contract After your contract with BMW Assist has ex

pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac tivated by the service center without you having to visit a workshop. After deactivation, an Emergency Request is no longer possible.

Under certain circumstances, the system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up. The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished.

The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been es tablished. After the Emergency Request arrives at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstan ces. For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard on the hands-free system, the hands-free system may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW

Seite 248

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Br ea

kd ow

n as

si st

an ce

Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located under a cover on the left side of the cargo area. Press against the lower edge of the cover and remove the cover.

First aid kit* The first aid kit is located in the insert in the rear seat backrest.

1. Pull the release and remove the insert from the front.

2. Remove the first aid kit.

When replacing the insert, place both pins into the rail at the bottom and press the insert back in place. Ensure that the rear seat backrest up holstery is not damaged. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg ularly and replace any items promptly.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.

Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 219 phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance* can be es tablished directly.

Jump starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Seite 249

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo nents while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa tion can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other wise, there is the danger of short circuits.

Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive ter minal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal.

Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter

minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing assis tance.

5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre sponding engine or body ground of the ve hicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed. If the vehicle being started has a diesel en gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another

Seite 250

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Br ea

kd ow

n as

si st

an ce

attempt in order to allow the discharged bat tery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicle The parking brake is blocked The parking brake cannot be released

manually. When the parking brake is blocked, do not tow with the front axle lifted or the vehicle can be damaged. Contact your service center.

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Towing Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un available.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steer ing.

Larger steering wheel movements are re quired.

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Automatic transmission*: transporting your vehicle

Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a loading

platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.

Tow truck

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.

Seite 251

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Towing other vehicles

General information Light towing vehicle Your vehicle must not be lighter than the

vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control vehicle response.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Maneuvering capability is limited during cor

nering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se cured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is contained in the tool kit under the cargo floor cover.

Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads

only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve hicle can occur.

Screw thread

Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.

Tow-starting

Automatic transmission* Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.

Seite 252

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Br ea

kd ow

n as

si st

an ce

Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 249. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con verter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 65, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch

pressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warn ing system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 253

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Care Car washes Notes

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 / 60 . Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam age or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the high- pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/ 30 cm.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve hicle.

Washing in automatic car washes Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car washes right from the start. Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Notes Note the following: Make sure that the wheels and tires are not

damaged by the transport mechanisms. Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 70, to avoid unintentional wiper activation.

Do not treat the convertible top with wax. Ensure that a cycle without wax or a special cycle for convertibles is available.

In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system*. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 43.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll when the following steps are taken: Manual transmission:

1. Shift to neutral. 2. Release the parking brake, refer to page 67. 3. Switch the engine off. 4. Switch on the ignition. Automatic transmission*:

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Release the parking brake, refer to page 67,

or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 67.

4. Switch the engine off. Transmission position P with the igni tion off

When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an auto matic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N.

Seite 254

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ca re

A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati cally: When the ignition is switched off. After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to

insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.

Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan gerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention.

Environmental influences can act on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences.

Caring for the convertible top The appearance and life of the convertible top depend on correct care and operation. Note the following instructions: To avoid water stains, mildew spots, and

chafe marks, do not fold and stow the con vertible top in the convertible top well while the top is wet or frozen.

Remove water stains that may nevertheless have appeared on the headliner using a mi crofiber cloth and an interior cleaner.

When the vehicle is parked in enclosed areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the area is well ventilated.

Remove bird droppings immediately as their corrosive effect will otherwise attack the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.

Do not use spot remover, paint thinner, solvent, benzine, or similar products to re

move spots on the convertible top. These prod ucts may destroy the rubber coating. Incorrect care and cleaning may cause the convertible top and its seams to become leaky.

To remove heavy soiling, use a special conver tible top cleaner. Follow the instructions for use from the manu facturer. Treat the convertible top with an impregnating agent after it has been washed three to five times.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

Seite 255

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma terial vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets above 140 /60 ; follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Chrome surfaces* Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particu larly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans ers. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil icon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts* Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components These include: Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic cleanser, if necessary. Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Floor carpets and floor mats* No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.

Seite 256

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ca re

Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.

Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens Clean the displays with a microfiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleans

ers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Seite 257

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Reference This chapter contains technical data, short

commands for the voice activation system, and an index that will quickly take you to the information

you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Technical data Dimensions Width, height

1 Vehicle height: 53.8 inches / 1,365 mm 2 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74.6 in

ches / 1,894 mm 3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 81.9 in

ches / 2,081 mm

Seite 260

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a

Length, wheel base

1 Wheel base: 112.4 inches / 2,855 mm 2 Length: 192.8 inches / 4,896 mm

Smallest turning circle Dia.: 38 ft 5 inches/11.7 m

Weights

650i

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission Sport automatic transmission

lbs/kg lbs/kg

5,401/2,450 5,401/2,450

Load lbs/kg 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,679/1,215

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Cargo area capacity With cargo area partition flipped up

cu ft/l cu ft/l

10.6/300 12.4/350

Seite 261

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer to page 228

Windshield and headlamp washer system

US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0

Seite 262

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a

Short commands of the voice activation system* General information Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands

Adjusting Vehicle

Function Command

Open the main menu. Main menu

Open the options. Options

Open the settings. Settings

Info display of the instrument cluster. Info Display

Settings on the Control Display. Control display

Open the time and date. Time and date

Open the language and units. Language and units

Open the speed limit. Speed

Open the light. Lighting

Open the door lock. Door locks

Open the profiles. Profiles

Equipment*

Function Command

Open the air conditioning settings. Climate

Open the Head-up Display. head up display

Seite 263

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Vehicle information Owner's Manual

Function Command

Open the Owner's Manual. Display Owner's Manual

Open the Quick Reference Guide. Quick reference

Open the index. Owner's Manual

Open the search by pictures. Search by pictures

Computer

Function Command

Open the computer. Onboard info

Open the trip computer. Trip computer

Vehicle

Function Command

Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info

Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status

Navigation* General information

Function Command

Navigation menu. Navigation

Open the destination entry. Enter address

Enter the address. Enter address

Open destination guidance. Guidance

Start destination guidance. Start guidance

Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance

Open the home address. Home address

Open the route criteria. Route preference

Seite 264

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sh or

t c om

m an

ds o

f t he

vo ic

e ac

tiv at

io n

sy st

em

Function Command

Open the route. Route information

Switch on the spoken instruction. Switch on voice instructions

Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions

Switch off the spoken instruction. Switch off voice instructions

Display the address book. Address book

Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations

Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info

Special destinations. Points of interest

Map

Function Command

Display the map. Map

Map facing north. Map facing north

Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel

Perspective map. Map perspective view

Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling

Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet

Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale 100 meters

Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map scale 5 kilo meters

Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale 5 miles

Split screen settings

Function Command

Split screen. Switch on splitscreen

Switch off the split screen. Turn off split screen

Adjust the split screen. Split screen content

Split screen, map facing north. Split screen map facing north

Split screen, current position. Split screen current position

Seite 265

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Function Command

Split screen, facing the direction of travel. Split screen map in direction of travel

Split screen, perspective. Split screen perspective

Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. Splitscreen Exit ramp view

Split screen scale...feet. Split screen scale ... feet e.g., split screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...meters. Split screen scale ... meters e.g., split screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale...kilometers. Split screen scale ... kilometers e.g., split screen scale 5 kilometers

Split screen scale...miles. Split screen scale ... miles e.g., split screen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. Split screen, Traffic conditions

Split screen, computer. Split screen on board info

Split screen, trip computer. Splitscreen trip computer

Split screen, scale automatically. Split screen automatic scaling

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Enter a new destination. Enter address

Trip list. Stored trips

Radio FM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio. Radio

Open the FM stations. F M

Open the manual search. Manual

Seite 266

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sh or

t c om

m an

ds o

f t he

vo ic

e ac

tiv at

io n

sy st

em

Function Command

Select a frequency range. Select frequency

Open a station. Select station

AM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., frequency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations. A M

Open the manual search. Manual

Weather Band

Function Command

Open the Weather Band. Weather band

Switch on the Weather Band. Weather band on

Select a Weather Band station. Select a weather channel

Satellite radio*

Function Command

Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio

Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on

Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite radio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Open the stored stations. Presets

Choose a stored station. Select preset

Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2

Seite 267

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

CD/Multimedia* CD/DVD drive

Function Command

Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5 or C D track ... e.g., CD track 5

Play back a CD. C D on

Select a CD. Select C D

Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menu. C D and multimedia

CD and DVD. C D

Select a DVD. D V D ... e.g. DVD 3

Display the entertainment details on a split screen.

Entertainment details

Music collection

Function Command

Search for music, open a menu. Music search

Open the current playback. Current playback

Open the music collection. Music collection

Play back the music collection. Music collection on

Play back the most frequently played tracks. Top fifty

External devices

Function Command

Open the external devices. External devices

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

AUX at front. AUX front

Seite 268

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sh or

t c om

m an

ds o

f t he

vo ic

e ac

tiv at

io n

sy st

em

Tone

Function Command

Open the tone settings. Tone

Telephone*

Function Command

Dial a phone number. Dial number

Open the Telephone menu. Telephone

Display the phone book. Phonebook

Redialing. Redial

Display received calls. Received calls

List of messages Messages

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Office*

Function Command

Open the Office menu. Office

Display Office Today. Current office

Display the contacts. Contacts

Display the messages. Messages

Display the calendar. Calendar

Display the tasks. Tasks

Display the reminders. Reminders

Seite 269

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Contacts*

Function Command

Select a name. Choose name

My contacts. My contacts

Open the contacts. Contacts

New contact. New contact

BMW ConnectedDrive*

Function Command

Open BMW ConnectedDrive. Connected Drive

Open BMW Search. B M W Online

Seite 270

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Sh or

t c om

m an

ds o

f t he

vo ic

e ac

tiv at

io n

sy st

em

Seite 271

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 101 Activated-charcoal filter 126 Active Blind Spot Detec

tion 98 Active seat, front 55 Active seat ventilation,

front 55 Active Steering, integral 102 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 100 Adaptive drive 102 Adaptive light control 85 Additional telephone 196 Additives, oil 239 Adjustments, seats/head re

straints 53 Airbags 88 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 89 Air circulation, refer to Recir

culated-air mode 125 Air distribution, manual 123 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 125 Air pressure, tires 229 Air vents, refer to Ventila

tion 126 Air volume, automatic climate

control 124 Alarm system 42 Alarm, unintentional 43 All around the center con

sole 17 All around the interior rearview

mirror 18 All around the steering

wheel 12 ALL program, automatic cli

mate control 125

All-season tires, refer to Win ter tires 233

Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 129

Alternative oil types 239 AM/FM station 166 Announcement, navigation,

refer to Spoken instruc tions 155

Antifreeze, washer fluid 71 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 101 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 101 Appointments 212 Approved engine oils 239 Apps 222 Armrest, refer to Center arm

rest 132 Arrival time 78 Ashtray 129 Assist 218 Assistance, Roadside Assis

tance 249 Assistance when driving

off 101 Audio playback 173 Audio playback, Blue

tooth 188 AUTO intensity 124 Automatic car wash 254 Automatic Curb Monitor 59 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 89 Automatic headlamp con

trol 85 Automatic Hold 67 Automatic locking 39 Automatic recirculated-air

control 125 Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 40

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 72

AUTO program, automatic cli mate control 124

AUTO program, intensity 124 AUX-IN port 184 Average fuel consumption 77 Average speed 77 Axle loads, weights 261

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 54 Backrest, seats 53 Backrest, width 54 Backup camera 110 Backup lamps, bulb replace

ment 245 Balance 164 Band-Aids, refer to First aid

kit 249 Bar for tow-starting/tow

ing 252 Bass 164 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 247 Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 32 Battery, vehicle 247 Before entering the car

wash 254 Belts, safety belts 56 Beverage holder, cu

pholder 133 Bluetooth audio 188 BMW Apps 222 BMW Apps, video play

back 187 BMW Assist 218 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer

to Saving fuel 141 BMW homepage 6

Seite 272

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ev er

yt hi

ng fr

om A

to Z

BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys

tem 241 BMW Online 220 Bottle holder, refer to Cu

pholder 133 Brake assistant 101 Brake discs, breaking in 138 Brake force display 100 Brake lamps, brake force dis

play 100 Brake lamps, bulb replace

ment 245 Brake lights, adaptive 100 Brake pads, breaking in 138 Braking, notes 139 Breakdown assis

tance 248, 249 Breaking in 138 Brightness of Control Dis

play 80 Bulb replacement 243 Bulb replacement, front 244 Bulb replacement, rear 245 Bulbs and lamps 243 Button, Start/Stop 65 Bypassing, refer to starting

aid 249

C Calendar 212 California Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera, backup camera 112 Camera, care 257 Camera, Side View 115 Camera, Top View 114 Can holder, refer to Cu

pholder 133 Car battery 247 Car care products 255 Care, displays 257 Care, vehicle 255 Cargo 140 Cargo area, cargo area parti

tion 47 Cargo area lid 40

Cargo area partition 47 Cargo area, storage compart

ments 134 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 141 Car key, refer to Remote con

trol 32 Carpet, care 256 Car wash 254 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 138 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 241 CD/DVD 173 CDs, storing 180 Cell phone 196 Center armrest 132 Center console 17 Central locking system 35 Central screen, refer to Control

Display 19 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing parts 243 Changing wheels/tires 233 Check Control 82 Children, seating position 62 Children, transporting

safely 62 Child restraint fixing sys

tem 62 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 63 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 62 Child seat, mounting 62 Child seats 62 Chrome parts, care 256 Cigarette lighter 129 Cleaning, displays 257 Climate control 123 Climate control wind

shield 139 Clock 76 Closing/opening from in

side 39 Closing/opening via door

lock 38

Closing/opening with remote control 36

Combination instrument 14 Combination instrument, elec

tronic displays 16 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 69 Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 69 Comfort Access 41 COMFORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control 105 Computer 76 Concierge service 219 Condensation on win

dows 124 Condensation under the vehi

cle 140 Condition Based Service

CBS 241 Confirmation signal 37 Contacts 207, 216 Control Display 19 Control Display, settings 79 Controller 19 Control systems, driving sta

bility 101 Convenient closing 37 Convenient opening 36 Convertible, convertible

top 45 Convertible mode, automatic

climate control 124 Convertible program, auto

matic climate control 124 Convertible top 45 Convertible top, care 255 Convertible top, cargo area

partition 47 Convertible top, emergency

operation 47 Convertible top, rollover pro

tection system 91 Convertible top tool 47 Coolant 239 Coolant temperature 75 Cooling function 125 Cooling, maximum 124

Seite 273

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Cooling system 239 Corrosion on brake discs 140 Cruise control 106 Cruising range 74 Cupholder 133 Current fuel consumption 75 Current location, storing 148 Customer Relations 221

D Damage, tires 232 Damping control, dy

namic 102 Data, technical 260 Date 76 Daytime running lights 85 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 124 Destination distance 77 Destination guidance 153 Destination guidance with in

termediate destinations 152 Destination input, naviga

tion 146 Digital clock 76 Digital radio 167 Dimensions 260 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 60 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 69 Display in front wind

shield 121 Display, instrument cluster 74 Display lighting, refer to Instru

ment lighting 87 Displays 14 Displays, cleaning 257 Disposal, coolant 240 Disposal, vehicle battery 247 Distance control, refer to

PDC 107 Distance to destination 77 Divided screen view, split

screen 23 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 32

Doors, Automatic Soft Clos ing 40

Drive-off assistant 101 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 101 Driving instructions, breaking

in 138 Driving notes, general 138 Driving stability control sys

tems 101 Driving tips 138 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 101 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 101 DVD/CD 173 DVD/CD notes 179 DVD changer 177 DVD settings 176 DVDs, storing 180 DVD, video 175 Dynamic Damping Con

trol 102 Dynamic destination guid

ance 159 Dynamic Drive 102 Dynamic Driving Control 103 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 101 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 101

E EfficientDynamics, refer to

Saving fuel 141 Electronic displays, instru

ment cluster 16 Electronic engine oil level

check 238 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 101 Emergency detection, remote

control 33 Emergency operation, conver

tible top 47 Emergency release, door

lock 39

Emergency release, fuel filler flap 226

Emergency Request 248 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 249 Emergency start function, en

gine start 33 Emergency unlocking, trunk

lid 41 Energy Control 75 Energy recovery 76 Engine compartment 236 Engine compartment, working

in 236 Engine coolant 239 Engine oil 238 Engine oil, adding 238 Engine oil additives 239 Engine oil filler neck 238 Engine oil temperature 75 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 239 Engine oil types, ap

proved 239 Engine start during malfunc

tion 33 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 66 Engine start, Starting aid 249 Engine stop 66 Engine temperature 75 Entering/exiting vehicle, assis

tance, steering wheel 61 Equalizer 164 Equipment, interior 128 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to DSC 101 Exchanging wheels/tires 233 Exhaust system 138 Exterior mirror, automatic dim

ming feature, dimmable exte rior mirrors 60

Exterior mirrors 59 External devices 184 External start 249 External temperature dis

play 75

Seite 274

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ev er

yt hi

ng fr

om A

to Z

External temperature warn ing 75

Eyes for securing cargo 141

F Fader 164 Failure message, refer to

Check Control 82 False alarm, refer to Uninten

tional alarm 43 Fan, refer to Air volume 124 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 82 Filler neck for engine oil 238 Fine wood, care 256 First aid kit 249 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow

fitting 252 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 91 Flat tire, warning lamp 93, 95 Flat tire, wheel change 246 Flooding 139 Floor carpet, care 256 Floor mats, care 256 FM/AM station 166 Fold-out position, windshield

wipers 71 Foot brake 139 Front airbags 88 Front fog lamps 87 Front lamps 244 Front passenger airbags, au

tomatic deactivation 89 Front passenger airbags, indi

cator lamp 90 Front seats 53 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 95 Fuel cap 226 Fuel consumption, current 75 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump tion 77

Fuel filler flap 226 Fuel gauge 74 Fuel quality 228

Fuel, tank capacity 262 Fuse 247

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 128

Gas station recommenda tion 155

Gear change, automatic trans mission 72

Gear shift indicator 79 General driving notes 138 Glove compartment 132 GPS navigation, refer to Navi

gation system 146 Gross vehicle weight, ap

proved 261 Gross weight, permissible for

trailer towing 261

H Hand brake, refer to Parking

brake 67 Hand-held transmitter, alter

nating code 129 Hazard warning flashers 248 HD Radio 167 Headlamp control, auto

matic 85 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 84 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture via remote control 37 Headlamp flasher 69 Headlamp glass 244 Headlamps 244 Headlamps, care 255 Headlamp washer system 69 Head restraints 53 Head restraints, front 57 Head-up Display 121 Head-up Display, care 257 Heavy cargo, stowing 141 Height, seats 53 Height, vehicle 260

High-beam Assistant 86 High beams 69 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 86 Hills 140 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 101 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 133 Homepage 6 Hood 236 Horn 12 Hotel function 39 Hot exhaust system 138 House number, entering for

navigation 147 Hydroplaning 139

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 75 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 75 Identification marks, tires 231 Identification number, refer to

Engine compartment 236 iDrive 19 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 32 Ignition off 65 Ignition on 65 Indication of a flat tire 93, 95 Indicator and warning mes

sages 14 Indicator lamps 14 Individual air distribution 123 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure, tires 229 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 95 Info display, refer to Com

puter 76 Information on the navigation

data 160 Initialization, Integral Active

Steering 103

Seite 275

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95

Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon itor TPM 92

Instrument cluster 14, 74 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 16 Instrument lighting 87 Integral Active Steering 102 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote

control 128 Intensity, AUTO program 124 Interactive map 150 Interior equipment 128 Interior lamps 87 Interior lamps via remote con

trol 37 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview mirror 60 Interior rearview mirror, auto

matic dimming feature 60 Intermediate destinations 152 Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi

gation 147 Interval display, service re

quirements 81 iPod/iPhone 185

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 246 Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 246 Joystick, automatic transmis

sion 72

K Key/remote control 32 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 41 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 33 Kickdown, automatic trans

mission 72 Knee airbag 88

L Lamp replacement 243 Lamp replacement, front 244 Lamp replacement, rear 245 Lamps 84 Lamps and bulbs 243 Lane departure warning 97 Lane margin, warning 97 Language on Control Dis

play 80 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 141 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 63 Leather, care 255 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 244 Length, vehicle 261 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 24 License plate lamp, bulb re

placement 245 Light-alloy wheels, care 256 Light control 85 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 244 Lighting 84 Lighting via remote control 37 Light switch 84 Load 141 Loading 140 Lock, door 38 Locking/unlocking from in

side 39 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 38 Locking/unlocking with re

mote control 36 Locking, automatic 39 Locking, central 35 Locking via trunk lid 41 Low beams 84 Low beams, automatic, refer to

High-beam Assistant 86 Lower back support 54 Lug bolt lock 246 Lumbar support 54

M Maintenance 241 Maintenance require

ments 241 Maintenance, service require

ments 81 Maintenance System,

BMW 241 Malfunction displays, refer to

Check Control 82 Manual air distribution 123 Manual air volume 124 Manual brake, refer to Parking

brake 67 Manual mode, transmis

sion 73 Manual operation, backup

camera 110 Manual operation, door

lock 39 Manual operation, exterior mir

rors 59 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 226 Manual operation, Park Dis

tance Control PDC 108 Manual operation, Side

View 114 Manual operation, Top

View 113 Manual transmission 71 Map, destination entry 150 Map in split screen 157 Map view 155 Marking on approved

tires 233 Marking, run-flat tires 234 Massage seat, front 55 Master key, refer to Remote

control 32 Maximum cooling 124 Maximum speed, winter

tires 234 Measure, units of 80 Medical kit 249 Memory for seat, mirrors,

steering wheel 58

Seite 276

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ev er

yt hi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Menu in instrument cluster 76 Menus, operating, iDrive 19 Menus, refer to iDrive operat

ing concept 20 Message list, traffic bulle

tins 157 Messages 210 Messages, refer to Check

Control 82 Microfilter 126 Minimum tread, tires 232 Mirror 59 Mirror memory 58 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 139 Mobile phone 196 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 244 Monitor, refer to Control Dis

play 19 Mounting of child restraint fix

ing systems 62 MP3 player 184 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 12 Multimedia 173 Music collection 180 Music search 181 Music, storing 180

N Navigation 146 Navigation data 160 Neck restraints, front, refer to

Head restraints 57 New wheels and tires 233 Night Vision with pedestrian

detection 118 NORMAL program, Dynamic

Driving Control 105 Notes 213 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 252

O OBD Onboard Diagnos

tics 241 Obstacle marking, backup

camera 111 Odometer 76 Office 207 Oil 238 Oil, adding 238 Oil additives 239 Oil change interval, service re

quirements 81 Oil filler neck 238 Oil level check 238 Oil types, alternative 239 Oil types, approved 239 Old batteries, disposal 247 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 241 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 19 Online, refer to BMW On

line 220 Opening/closing from in

side 39 Opening/closing via door

lock 38 Opening/closing with remote

control 36 Operating concept, iDrive 19 Outside air, refer to Automatic

recirculated-air control 125 Overheating of engine, refer to

Coolant temperature 75

P Paint, vehicle 255 Panic mode 37 Parallel parking assistant 115 Park Distance Control

PDC 107 Parked-car ventilation 126 Parked vehicle, condensa

tion 140 Parking aid, refer to PDC 107 Parking assistant 115

Parking brake 67 Parking lamps 84 Parking with Auto Hold 67 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 59 Pathway lines, backup cam

era 110 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 107 Pedestrian detection, refer to

Night Vision 118 People detection, refer to

Night Vision 118 Permissible axle load 261 Personal information 207 Personal Profile 33 Phone 196 Pinch protection system, win

dows 44 Plastic, care 256 PlugIn 223 Position, storing 148 Postal code, entering in navi

gation 146 Power failure 247 Power windows 43 Pressure, tire air pres

sure 229 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 95 Profile, refer to Personal Pro

file 33 Programmable memory but

tons, iDrive 23 Protective function, win

dows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 19

R Radiator fluid 239 Radio 166 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 32 Radio ready state 65 Rain sensor 70 Random 174

Seite 277

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Random playback 174 RDS 167 Reading out loud 214 Rear axle steering 102 Rear lamps 245 Rearview mirror 59 Rear window defroster 125 Recirculated-air mode 125 Recommended tire

brands 233 Refueling 226 Remaining range 74 Reminders 213 Remote control/key 32 Remote control, malfunc

tion 38 Remote control, universal 128 Replacement fuse 247 Replacing parts 243 Replacing wheels/tires 233 Reporting safety defects 8 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 74 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon

itor TPM 92 Residual heat, automatic cli

mate control 125 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 141 Retreaded tires 233 Roadside Assistance 219 Roadside parking lamps 85 Rollover protection system 91 Roll stabilization, refer to

Adaptive Drive 102 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy

namic Drive 102 Roof load capacity 261 Rope for tow-starting/tow

ing 252 Route 154 Route criteria, route 153 Route, displaying 154 Routes, avoiding 154 Route section, bypassing 155 RSC Runflat System Compo

nent, refer to Run-flat tires 234

Rubber components, care 256

Run-flat tires 234

S Safe braking 139 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder 56 Safety belts 56 Safety belts, care 256 Safety systems, airbags 88 Satellite radio 168 Saving fuel 141 Scale, changing during navi

gation 156 Screen, refer to Control Dis

play 19 Screwdriver 243 Screw thread for tow fit

ting 252 Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 56 Seat heating, front 55 Seating position for chil

dren 62 Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory 58 Seats 53 Seat ventilation, front 55 Selection list in instrument

cluster 76 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 72 Sensors, care 257 Service and warranty 7 Service requirements, CBS

Condition Based Serv ice 241

Service requirements, dis play 81

Service, Roadside Assis tance 249

Settings on Control Dis play 79

Settings, storing for seat, mir rors, steering wheel 58

Shifting, automatic transmis sion 72

Shifting, manual transmis sion 71

Shift paddles on steering wheel 73

Short commands 263 Shoulder support 54 Side airbags 88 Side View 114 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 37 Sitting safely 53 Size 260 Ski bag 131 Smallest turning circle 261 Smoker's package 129 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 205 Snow chains 234 Socket 130 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nostics 241 Software applications,

iPhone 222 Software update 191 Spare fuse 247 Special destinations, naviga

tion 149 Specified engine oil

types 239 Speed, average 77 Speed limit, setting 78 Speedometer 14 Split screen 23 Split screen map settings 157 Spoken instructions, naviga

tion 155 SPORT+ program, Dynamic

Driving Control 104 Sport automatic transmis

sion 73 SPORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control 104 Sport program, transmis

sion 73 Stability control systems 101 Start/Stop button 65

Seite 278

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ev er

yt hi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Start function during malfunc tion 33

Starting aid 249 Starting the engine 66 State/province, selecting for

navigation 146 Stations, stored 172 Station, storing 166 Status display, tires 92 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering, Integral Active

Steering 102 Steering wheel, adjusting 60 Steering wheel heating 61 Steering wheel memory 58 Steptronic, automatic trans

mission 72 Stopping the engine 66 Storage compartments 132 Storage compartments, loca

tions 132 Storage, tires 234 Storing the vehicle 257 Street, entering for naviga

tion 147 Summer tires, tread 232 Supplementary text mes

sage 82 Surround View 110 Suspension settings 103 Switch for Dynamic Driving

Control 103 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 126 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6

T Tachometer 75 Tail and brake lamps 245 Tailgate 40 Tailgate via remote control 37 Tail lamps 245 Tail lamps, bulb replace

ment 245 Tasks 213

Technical changes, refer to Safety 7

Technical data 260 TeleService 218 Temperature, automatic cli

mate control 124 Temperature display, external

temperature 75 Temperature, engine oil 75 Terminal, starting aid 250 Text messages 210 Text message, supplemen

tary 82 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 42 Theft protection, lug

bolts 246 Theft protection, refer to Cen

tral locking system 35 Thermal camera, refer to Night

Vision 118 Thigh support 54 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Tilt, seats 53 Time of arrival 78 Tire damage 232 Tire identification marks 231 Tire inflation pressure 229 Tire inflation pressure monitor,

refer to FTM 95 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 91 Tires, changing 233 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 229 Tires, run-flat tires 234 Tire tread 232 Toll roads, route 154 Tone 164 Tool kit 243 Tools 243 Top View 112 Total vehicle weight 261 Tow fitting 252 Towing 251 Town/city, navigation 146 Tow-starting 251 Tow truck 251

TPM Tire Pressure Moni tor 91

Traction control 101 TRACTION program, Dynamic

Driving Control 104 Traffic bulletins, naviga

tion 157 Traffic situation/gray card 158 Transmission, automatic 72 Transmission, manual 71 Transporting children

safely 62 Tread, tires 232 Treble, tone 164 Trip computer 78 Triple turn signal activa

tion 69 Trip odometer 76 Truck for tow-starting/tow

ing 251 Trunk, cargo area partition 47 Trunk lid 40 Trunk lid, emergency unlock

ing 41 Trunk lid, hotel function 39 Trunk lid via remote con

trol 37 Turning circle 261 Turning circle lines, backup

camera 111 Turn signals, operation 69 Turn signals, rear, bulb re

placement 245

U Unintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 80 Universal remote control 128 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 72 Unlocking/locking from in

side 39 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 38 Unlocking/locking with remote

control 36

Seite 279

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Re

fe re

nc e

M ob

ili ty

Co m

m un

ic at

io n

En te

rta in

m en

t Na

vig at

io n

Dr ivi

ng ti

ps Co

nt ro

ls At

a gl

an ce

Updates made after the edito rial deadline 6

Updating software 191 Upholstery care 256 USB audio interface 185 USB interface 132

V Variable steering, Integral Ac

tive Steering 102 Vehicle battery 247 Vehicle battery, replacing 247 Vehicle, breaking in 138 Vehicle care 255 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification number in the engine compart ment 236

Vehicle jack 246 Vehicle paint 255 Vehicle storage 257 Vehicle wash 254 Ventilation 126 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car

ventilation 126 Version of the navigation

data 160 Video playback 175 Video playback, iPhone 187 Video playback, snap-in

adapter 187 Voice activation, mobile

phone 203 Voice activation, short com

mands 263 Voice activation system 25 Volume, setting 164

W Warning lamps 14 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 82 Warning triangle 249 Washer fluid 71 Washer fluid reservoir, ca

pacity 262

Washer nozzles, wind shield 71

Washer system 69 Washing, vehicle 254 Water on roads 139 Weather Band 168 Weights 261 Welcome lamps 84 Wheel base, vehicle 261 Wheel change 246 Wheels, changing 233 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 229 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 95 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 91 Width, vehicle 260 Wind deflector 50 Window defroster, rear 125 Windows, powered 43 Windshield, climate con

trol 139 Windshield washer fluid 71 Windshield washer noz

zles 71 Windshield washer system 69 Windshield wiper 69 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 71 Winter storage, care 257 Winter tires, suitable tires 233 Winter tires, tread 232 Wiper blades, replacing 243 Wiper fluid 71 Wiper system 69 Wood, care 256 Word match concept, naviga

tion 24 Wrench 243

X Xenon headlamps, bulb re

placement 244

Y Your individual vehicle 6

Seite 280

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 521 - 03 11 490

Ev er

yt hi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 6 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 6 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 6 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 650i xDrive Convertible 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.